DOCUMENT RESUME

ED 079 305 SP 006 726

AUTHOI Knight, ,Martha, Ed.; And others 71TLE Tenni3-radminton-Squaoh Guide witri Jun' 197.L June 1:474. INSTITU110 An.rican Association for health, , and Fecreation, Wasninytun, L.C. Div. for Girls and Women's Sports. PUB Dit'IL 12 NOTE 209p. AVAILABLE IROIY; American Association for Health, Physical Lducation, and Recreation, 1201 sixteenth St., N. W., ,:ashinyton, D. C.20Cit. (Jtock No. 243-25298, $1.53)

:;DRS3 Ric; MF-$0.65 HC Not Available from EDRS. DESCR:PT *Athletic Programs; *futnletics; *Physical Activ.ties; *Physical Education; I:eaching aechnique,s; AiiS; *Womens 'Education

AESTRA0S ruf.z's in , badminton, ana squash for y:.ris and women from June 1972 June 1974 are discussed. Standards in the sports arr, detailed along with the Division for3ir:'.s and Wonen's .sports (DGWS) statement of beliefs. Specific articles dealing w:An caching techniques, officiating techniques, and rules for tennis Irld badminton are presented. Introauctpry information 011 squash is :_ncluded along with the United. States ::quash --tacquets itssociation's singles rules. Biblioyraphies an lists of visual aids are pres,?.nted for tennis and badminton. (BRB) SPORTS LIBRARY FOR GIRLS ANDWOMEN DIVISION FOR GIRLS AND WOMEN'SSPORTS

Each Guide contains official playing rules for girlsand women, articles on techniques, teaching, and organization, bibliographies,and certain special features related to the sports coveredin the respective books. A section in each Guide presents information about the Divisionfor Girls and Women's Sports and the services it offers to teachers

Current Edition Stock No. Next Edition 1971.73 Aquatics Guide (243. 25138) June 1973 1972-74 - (243-25288) May 1974 1972 73 Guide . . . (243 251401July 1973 1971.73 BowlingFencing-Golf Guided. (243-25136) 1972-74 Field Hockeyacrosse Guide. (243. 07310) June 1974 1971 73 Guide...... (243-25144) May 1973 1971 73 Outing Activities and Winter Sports Guide.. (243. 25146) May 1973 1972-74 Soccer-Speedball-Flag Football Guide...... (243. 07302)June 1974 1972-74 Guide (243. 25156)January 1974 1970.72 Badminton- Squash Gt,ide 1243 25298/May 1974 1972.74 Track and Field Guide.. (24125158) Janua.y1974 1971 13 Guide.... (243-25148)June 1973

WA ed11111\ BOVIitI enk me Gunk oils b.. 1,1nu,g1971

No returns Discounts on c uantity lotsof same title. Order for Guides will be filled with current editions unlessotherwise specified All orders other than those on official purchase order formsmust be accompanied by payment Shipping and handling charges will be addedto all billed ordersPostage stamps are clot accepted as oaymclit No C.O.D. orders SCOREBOOKS OfficialBasketball (243 07186),FieldHockey(243 06870),Softball (243 07184), Volleyball (243 6/834). ORDER FROM American Association for Health, Physical Education,and Recreation 12U I Sixteenth Street, N W, Washington, 0. C 20036 FILMED FROM BESTAVAILABLE COPY E US DE PARTmENT OF HEALTH oNLY E °VC A if ON & WELFARE NATIONAL INSTITUTE OF EDUCATION v fitt% _v A' Grr, E .,CC% ,t t ;C, p C .Y2 %trir":".Q Prat Tennis-Badminton- Squash GUIDE

JUNE 1972 - JUNE 1974

With Official Rules

Editors

Mai tha Knight. Tennis

Colleen O'Connor, Badminton

Betty Brown, Squash

THE DIVISION FOR GIRLS AND WOMEN'S SPORTS I meruan Association for Health. Physical kclucation. and Recnation Copyright 0 1972 by the Division for Girls and Women's Sports of the American Association for Health, Physical Education, and Recreation

Libra, r of Congress Catalog Card No. 47-19887

Published by the

AMERICAN ASSOCIATION FOR HEALTH, PHYSICAL EDUCATION, AND RECREATION

A National Affiliate of the National Education Association

1201 Sixteenth St., N.W. Washington, D.C. 20036 Contents

DIVISION FOR GIRLS AND WOMEN'S SPORTS 5 Sports Guides and Official Rules Committee Interest Indicatzir 6 OGWS Statement of Beliefs 7 Standards in Sports for Girls and Women 11 Sources of Information and Service 12 OGWS Executive Council 14 Sports Guides and Official Rules Committee 16 Association for Intercollegiate Athletics for Women 19 TENNIS OGWS Tennis Committees 20 Tennis Courtesy Luell Mai Giahrze andLinda Elliott 22 Doubles Positioning for Beginners ...... Ann Read 26 Task Methad of Teaching Tennis ...... Elkaheilz Peirakis 31 Observational Learning in Tennis John Iv. Santrock 35 The Tennis Drive Skills Test Gerairn J. Shepard 39 Working the Goponent out of Position .. .fatrzcza Arm Sherman 43 Beneficial lndo'r Orill for Advanced Players.. E Dawn McDonald 48 Nielsen Stadium: A Top 10 Rating Nano. Richwine 50 Selected Tennis Bibliography ...... Revised bySharon Crow 52 Selected Tennis Visual Aids Revised byKaren Emery 55 USLTA Women's National Collegiate Tennis Championships.. 59 Tennis Study Que::tinns .... 61 Techniques of Officiating Tennis 66 Rules of Lawn Tennis and Cases and Oecisions 73 Conditions Governing Tennis Players 90 USLTA Tournament Regulations 94 "Tie-Break" Procedures for Tennis 102 OFFICIATING SERVICES AREA . 105 Officiating Executue Board 107 Affiliated Boards of Officials 110 Standards for Officials Ratings 115 Sources of Information and Material 124 BADMINTON OGWS Badminton Committees 125 Construction of Self-Testing Practice Situations ... .l'zr.eznza Lee Bell 127 Badminton Self-Testing Practice Drills Joan 1). Johnsonand Doreen Inch 131 Conditioning for Competitive Badminton ..Martha Stephens 139 CONTENTS 3 International Team for Women: The Uber and Devlin Cups ...... Thane Moore Ilalev 143 The Woman's Role in Mixed DoublesJune Burke .ind Clinton Smith 146 partnerships with a Plus Bero W. Tern 152 A Decade of Research. Shute' Dutton Anti Ifettt R Ilan:mend 157 Selected Badminton Bibliography ...... Revised byrerila Hanes and .Sue Ihompson 162 Selected Badminton Visual Aids Revised byL.; nn carpenter and Marilyn Parrich 166 Badminton Study Questions 170 Techniques of Officiating Badminton 177 Laws of Badminton 187

SQUASH DGWS Squash Committee and Editorial Comment 196 Basic Ideas for Beginning Squash Uh rrl Sheilenherge 197 An Introduction to Squash...... Marig,,rld /1. kilwardc 199 Squash Racquets Association Singles Rules 202

4 DGWS TENNISBADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE DIVISION FOR GIRLS AND WOMEN'SSPORTS I he Division for Girls and Women'sSports Is a nonprofit educa- tional organuation designed toserve the needs and interests of ad- nunistrators, teachers, leaders, andparticipants in sports programs for girls end women Itis one of eight divisions of the American Association for Health. swat I ducation and RecreationActive members of the [Arson al;%%omen members of the American Association for !Icahn, l'hy.ical loitication,and Recreation who are interested in ports for girls andwomen and who participate in the work ofthe Division"I hese women are professional leaders schools, in colleges, commund), centers. industrialplants.imiltar) services, public and private dubs, andagencies I he purpose of the Divisionfor Girls and k omen's Sportsis to luster the development of spoilsprograms for the enrichment of the life of the participant I he Division for Girls and WomenSports attempts to promote desirable sports pirgrams through formulating and publicuing guidingprinciples stood standards for I he administrator, nadir. off n. IA and pia!,er ..1%,i(1)11,11::friinig and interpretingrules rocermiig sports for girls and Providing theInca's,tortraining.evaluating, and 4011.1.11s rating of 4 D issenunating information on the conduct of girlsand women s sports Stimulating. evaluating and disseminatingresearch m the field of girls and women's sports ( Organiruig various units of AMIN Rconcerned prunarill vc,th girls and women's sports in orderto et eft el fective leadership. Sharingintheinterests of other A R dicAsions and or sections in promoting sportsprograms, 8r .fooperatingwithallied groups interested intartsand sports in order to tormulate policies and women's conduct of women's sports rules that attest the

DIVISION FOR GIRLS AND WOMEN'S SPORTS SPORTS GUIDES AND OFFICIAL RULES COMMITTEE INTEREST INDICATOR The SGOR Committee is endeavoring to broaden its base of personnel and to atrengthenits services to Guide readers. The purpose of this form =s to offer readers an opportunity to join us in meeting this need. Please complete this form and send it to the SG OR Associate Chairman-elect. whose name and address appear on page 16.

Na me Professional Address City State Zip Code_

I Check the Sport ('ommitteets) which would be of interest to

,Nquatst..s Rig football _ Speedball Artheo i Golf Squash -- Badminton __ Iemus Basketball I!cross. I rid. amf t mid Irossling __ Outing Acti%ales _Voile) ball _ Ieming Soccer Winter Sports held loske) Softball 2 Would you like to serve as .1 member of a Sports Guide Committee of your interest')* .Yes No 3 Would you consider submitting an article to a Guide Committee as a prospective author? Yes No Possible topic or title 4 Can you suggest topics for articles which you would like to have included m future Guidec7 (Please indicate sport )

5Are there others whom you wttuld recommend for consideration as possible committee members or authors? Please indicate below. (Ike additional paper, if necessary.) Name Sport(s) Professional Address City Stile Zip ('ode Sports Committee Nlemlur Pri spectisc Author () (Check one)

.Youetas serw ononlyone SportGuideCommittee al a tuns 6 DGVVS TENNISrADMINTOSQUASH GUIDE OGWS STATEMENT OF BELIEFS We believe that opportunities for instruction and participation in sports should tie included in the educatiunal experiences of every girl.Sports are an integral part of the culture in which we live. Sports skills and sports participation are valuable social and recre- ational tools which may be used to enrich the lives of women in our society. We belzeie that sports opportunities at all levels of skill should he available to girls and women who wish to take advantage of these experiences. Competition and cooperation may be demonstrated in all sports programs although the type and intensity of the com- petition will varyInit 1the degree or level of skill of the participants. An understanding of the relationship between competition and cooperation and of how to utilize both within the accepted frame- work of our society is one of the desirable outcomes of sports participation. We believe in the importance of physical activity in the main- tenance of the general health of the participant We believe that participation in sports contributes to the develop- ment ofself-confidence and tothe establishmentof desirable interpersonal relations, For these reasons we believe that girls and women of all ages should he provided with comprehensive school and community programs of sports and recreation. In addition, they should be strongly and actively encouraged to take part in such programs.

PROGRAM We belies e that sports programs for girls and women should he broad, varied, and planned for participants 4t differing levels of skill, There should be full awareness of the wide span of individual differ- ences so that all types, ages, and skill levels are considered in the planning of sports program!. In coyfucting theN,dflOthphases of sports programs,principles must guide action. These principles should be based on the latest and soundest knowledge regarding I. Growth and development factors 2. Motor learning 3. Social and individual maturation and adjustment 4. The values of sports participation as recognized in our culture.

Elementary Schools (grades1.6) We believe in planned, comprehensive, and balanced programs of physical education for every girl in the elementary program. These should provide experiences in basic movements for example, skip-

DGWS STATEMENT OF BELIEFS 7 ping and simple dance steps, bending, reaching, and climbing and in a wide variety of activities which require basic sport skills such as catching, throwing, batting, and kicking. We believe that Intramural sports experiences in appropriately modifiedsportsactivitiesshouldsupplementaninstructional program for girls in grades 4, 5 Ind 6, and that in most cases these experiences will be sufficiently stimulating and competitive for the highly skilled girl. We believe extramural sports activities, if included in the upper elementary grades, should be limited to occasional play days (sports groups or teams composed ot representatives from several schools or units), sports days, and invitational events

Secondary Schools (grades 7.12) We believe that m secondary schools a program of intramural and extramural participation should be arranged to augment a sound and comprehensive instructional program in physical education for all girlsL xtramural programs should not be organized until there are broad instructional and intramural programs and a sufficient allot- ment of time, facilities, and personnel for new programs.

Colleges and Universities We believe that college and university instructional programs should go beyond those activities usually included in the high school program, There should be opportunities to explore and develop skills in a variety of activities, with emphasis on individual sportsItis desirable that opportunities for extramural experiences beyond the intramural program be accessible to the highly skilled young women who wish these opportunities.

Forms of Competition Intramural competitionissportscompetitioninwhichall participants are identified with the same school, community center, dub, organization, institution, or industry, or are residents 01 a designated small neighborhood or community. Extramural competition is a plan of sports competition in which participants from two or more schools, community centers, dubs, organizations, institutions, industries, or neighborhoods compete. he forms of extramural competition include I. Sports days school or sports group participates as a unit 2 Telegraphic meets- results are compared by wire or mail 3. Invitational events symposiums, games, or matchtto which a school or sports group invites one or more teams or individuals to participate. 4. Interscholastic, intercollegiate, or interagency programs groups which arc trained and coached play a series of scheduled games 8 DGWS TEN N ISBADM I NTONSQUASH GUIDE and cu tomnaments withlike teams from other schm gam/at ions Is, cities. Of 771atiOnai ('OMpett//0/1 involves and play CIS t(0111 ditterentnations provides sports e\penences !orindividuals or groups with rxcctoional abilityand emot 1011,1i ma Writ) pelltii,11 Untie! some ,ondnions I his type 01k OM- could include secondaryschool guns hut usually it is plannedfor mor,h mature participants (or<

ADMINISTRATION We belle%that (Main sal, guards should be the in usnied to inuteci health and %ken-being ofparticipants, Adequate health and insurance protection should be secured bythe institution bust aid services and emergency medicalcare should be available during all scheduled interscholasticsports events. Quaid ied professional should ensure aproper peitod for conditioning of leaders environment including equipment players, a Safe and facilities, a schedule witha Minted number ofgames, and similar measures We believe that sports ojizczatme should be the responsibilityof those who know anduse DOW S hold current ratings ppro,(1 rulesOfficials should w those sports in which ratingsare given. We believe that theentire I wan( ing of girls and women's programs should be included sports in the total school budget. Itis sug- gested that income be handledas a regular vl hoot income item. We believe that thescheduang of sports women should be in ace or dance activities fon girls and with them needs and thattheir schedule should not be requitedto conform to a league schedule established for boys and men'ssports We believethat ex,..ellemeof achievement shouldbe given c((cgnilion and that theintrinsic pursuit of excellence are of values which accrue fromthe when awards ale given, theyprimary importance. We believe that. should he inexpensive tokensOf a symb'ilic type, such as ribbons,letters, and small pins. We believe' thatexpert teaching and quality th nr own best public relatreinc. programs generate It is suggested thatan effective plan be developed for interpretingthe values of the sports parents, teacheis in other fields, program to and interested members ofthe OGWS STATEMENT OF BELIEFS 9 ,chool orc dlegc communityincluding th sshi h has proved suttesstul press.\procedore is to ins rte key, groups to a ~electionof de monstrations andsports events at ditterent levelsso that they may see ..ttettive programs inaction.

LEADERSHIP We believe that good leadership conduct of isessentialto the desirable the sports program. rhequalified leader meets the standards setIs, the profession, Including the plate and purpose of an understanding of II1 sports in edut,atron. ;2) thegrowth and develornent of children andyouth, r 31 the effects ofbx oche on the human organism, 141 firstaid and at,ement prevention, standing of spetnit skills, and 1.7,1 under- (6) sound teaching methods.Personal expel-write m orgamied extramuralcompetition is desirable for the young %coma!) planning to become sportsI he leader should a leader or teacher of women's demonstrate personal integrityand a primary concern for the welfare ofthe participant

POLICYM KING And we believe that all taders, teachers, and coachesof girls and women's sports shouldbe t wouraged to take inthepolicy an a,tive part decisions which affect planning,organiiing. and onductmg sports programs forgirls and women. Leaders make sure that qualified should women are appointed to thegoverning sports bodies at all levelsIota,. state, national, andinternational to ensure that programs are in the bestinte,est of those Who panic

10 DGWS TENNIS-BADMINTONSQUASHGUM' STANDARDS IN SPORTS FOR GIRLS AND WOMEN Standards in sports activities for girls and women should be based 'upon the following I Sports activities for girls and women should be taught, coached, and officiated by qualified women whenever and wherever possi- ble, 2 Programs should provide every girl with a wide ariety of activi- ties 3.I he results of competition should be judged in terms of beneNs to the partalpants rather than by the winning of championships or the athletic, or commercial athantage to schools -1r organiza- tions.

Health and Safety Standards for Players Careful superhion of the health of all players must be provided by I An examination by a qualified physn:an Written permission by a qualified physician after serious illness or injury 3 Removal of players when they are injured or overfatigued or show signs of emotional instability 4 A healthful, safe and sanitary environment for sports activity 5 Linntatioi s of competition to a geographical area which will pernntpl, y cis to return at reasonable hours, provision of safe transportat. m.

General Policies I. Select the members of all teams so that they play against those of approximately the same ability and maturity 2. Arrange the schedule of games and practices so as not to place demands on the team or player which would jeopardize the educational objectives of the comprehensive sports program. 3. Discourage any girl from practicing with, 01 playing with, a team for more than one group while competing in that sport during the same sport season 4 Promote social events in connection with all form:. of competi- tion,

STANDARDS IN SPORTS FOR GIRLS AND WOMEN 11 SOURCES OF INFORMATION AND SERVICE

The various services are offered by committees All request. for information of services should be addressed to the chairman ot the committee into khos field ot\Acid, the inquiry fallsInquiries which cannot he readiby cla.sitied should be addressed to the DCWS viceprcsident AUDIOVISUAL COMMIFT1'1'Reviewsfilms,adise. onpio- duction ilmides lists of up-to-date film. available for rental or pure ia.e Chairman AN ptETNAm, Cential Washington State College, Ilenst)urg 08926 ASSOCIATION FOR INTER( cm LI GL\ 11 ATI III ER SI OR \ \OMI N Sponsor. national tournaments and establishe. pro- ceduresforregional development and toi.an, Honing inter- collegiate events, hes:den t CAROL] OGLI 5131, Purdue l niv W I al'a cite, Ind, 47907 DIVISION IIISIORIAN !Maintain.fileof In.tofical recoids and publications which are available on loan, thstorzan IIAZFL 1'I :r1 RSON, Univ 01 Idaho, NI oscov. 83483 LIAISON Maintains relationships \soh allied national sport. orgam- talons ChairmanMI LDRI.D BARN! -S, Celina} 11iss01111 State ( oliege, Warrensbuig 64093 NM1ONAL INTRAMURAL SPOR IS COUNCIL A joint conical of DGWS and DMA to provide leadership to initiate improve intramural programs at all educational level. (Tear -man GFRALD (SRI GORY, Highland School, Skokie III 60076 oFmcIATING SFRVICLS ARM rest. and rates \k omen official. directs policies of local board. ChatrmanlLSIL C01313, NorthFe\ asState Unn ,Denton 7(203 (1972-73) PHILOSOPHY AND STANDARDS A RL A States and interpiets standards for gill. and cc omen'. Chairman, LOU WAN MON I R, Northern Illinois Imo.. DcKalb 60115 (1972-74) PUBLICATIONS COMNII L Solicits, receives, edits, and pub- sptmal publications and produce, sport. technique (.hart. Chairman NANC1 DAVIS, Skidmore College, Saratoga Sprung., N Y. 12866 12 DGWS TENNISBADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE RISF AR( 11 COMMITTEE- Carries out special studies, advises on iesearch problems, edits DGWS research articles. Chan man DOROTHY HARRIS, Penns Barna State limy , Uni- versity Park 16802 SPORTS GUIDES AND OFFICIAL RULES COMMITTEE Revises and interprets offic'rules, edits and publishes sports guides and technique charts. Chairman J ANIC PEARCE, Utah State Univ., Logan, 84231 STATE CHAIRMEN- Machchairman orgamies committees for educational and informational work within her state. See list in current DGWS Basket ball Guide STUD!' NI SPUR FS ORGANIZATIONS Orgam7ational and pro- giam service to GAA's and WAA's maintained through NGAA Protect and ('\VS. Omsul tan t131 ITN INCHUM, AAIIPER, 1201 Sixteenth St , N.\%., Washington, D.('. 20036 Publications SPUR rs LIBRARY FOR GIRLS AND WOMEN see inside front cover. SPI CLAPUI31 ICA I IONS see inside back cover

SOURCES 0 INFORMATION AND SERVICE 13 DGWS EXECUTIVE COUNCIL 1972-73

tcePresidentBettyHartman, KentState UlmKent, Ohio 44'40 I tee Presulent-electFrances Koenig, Central Michigan Lints Mt Pleasant 48858 ParrVicePresidentJoAnne Thorpe, Southein II Iii 01 Umv Carbondale 62901

Area Chairman CentralJanetNuiman, Washburn Umv., Topeka, Kans. 66620 (1971-73) t InaAnderson, Univ.ofNebraska,Lincoln 68508 (1973-75) Lacier nAnn Veneria, Newark State College, Union, N J07083 (1972-74) Geneyieve Ilartiler, Jackson High School, Jackson, Mich 40501 (1972-74) North's err Dorothy Dobie, Marylhurst College, Marylhurst, Ore. 97036 (1971-75) SouthernRoberta Boy ce Stokes, Miami-Dade JrCollege, South Campus, Miami, 1.1a 33156 (1971-73) SnuthwestI oye Printer, Logan Junior high School, I ogan, Utah 64321 (1972-73) unsonMildred Barnes, Cintial Missouri State Collegt, Warrens- burg 64093 (1971-73) Her tNancy Chapman, Univ of Illinois, Normal 01701 OJJrcruttog ServicesI:Isle Cobb, North 're \as State Um% Demon 76203 (1972-73) llec tMary Roland Guilin, Winthiop College, Rock MIL S. C 29730 Philosophy and StandardsI ou Jean Moyer, Northern Illinois , DeKalb 50115 (1972-74) ResearchDorothy !lams, Pennsylvania State Univ., University Park 16802 (1970-72) bhca normNancy Davis, Skidmore College, Saratoga, N,Y. 12866 (1971-73) ElectBarbaraI loepner, Univ t)1 California, Berkeley 94720 .1zhortalial'leanPutnam, Celina! Washington Collegeof Fducat LlIensburg 98926 (1969-73) PeriodicalsJoanIlulti,UnivofMaryland, College Park 20740 14 DGWS TENNIS-BADMINTON-SQUASH GUIDE Special PublicationsJudy Devine, Kent State Univ., Kent, Ohio 44 240 ( 1971-73) Sports Guides and Official RulesJanice Pearce, Utah State Univ Logan 84321 (1970-73) Associate ChairmanJoanna Davenport, Univ. of Illinois, Urbana 61801 (197 i-72) ,Issociate oidoman-clect. Sue Pernice, Indiana StateUniv.. Terre Haute 47809 HistorianHazel Peter.on. Univ. of Idaho, Moscow 83483 StniletttSportsOrganizationsConsultant.Betty Flinchum, AAIIITR, 1201 16th St, N.W., Washington, D.C. 20036 DGWS ConsultantMary ERekstad, AMIPER, 120116th St., N.W , Washington, D C. 20036

Stan Fragrant AssistantElizabeth Iloyt, AM IPER, 1201 16th St, N.W , Washington, 1) C 20036 I raison Representatives tram Other Organi:ations , .4//PLR. Women 'st thletie Section' Margaret Walker, McGill Univ., 475 Pine Ave. W., Montreal, Quebec, Canada A'a !zonalAssociationforPhrszcalEducanonnJColleg WomenJune Galloway, Univ of North Carolina, Greensboro 274:2 Other DGWS Structures Asmiczation for Inter«Wegzate ii 1h/ems for Women seep. 19 for of personnel. ,Vanonal Intramural Sports Council Gerald Gregory, ChaIrMan, Highland School, Skokie, 111. 60076 Catherine Gwen, Past Chairman, Univ. of Washington, Seattle 98105 Betty !Jewell, Princeton 1110 School, Princeton, N.J. 08540 Carolyn Hewitt, Chairman - elect, Women'sgym, Univ. of Foos, Austin 78712 Ronald Hyatt, Secretary, Univ. of North Carolina,Chapel Hill 27514

DGWS EXECUTIVE COUNCIL is SPORTS GUIDES AND OFFICIAL RULES COMMITTEE 1972.1973

Gen..irat Ctr,.-irn in

Janice Pearse. Matt ,I ogan 84321 10-0-73 Associate Chair:an Joanna ot Urbana 6 ...... Associate Chairman-Elect Sue Peinfte, Indiana Stab.. l nie 'fern: II,. lie 47809

Aquatics

Joanna NIK1b,ng. Indiana tam, Bloomington -19701 1971-7.3

Archery Jacqueline Shuts. Um% ot \finnesota. Nlinneapolis C5455 1972-7-1 Badminton Dons I lenderson. State hire Nor mal 61761

Basketball Nan Mauls,()liege ot Wooster, Wooster, Ohio 469 I .

Bowling I the' Dothert) Western Illinois 1'm% 'Macomb. III 61455 I')71-73 /1 (tloce C- urtis, 8C0 Ae I Abilene, I ev 7(4,01 1973-75

Fencing Nam} rut rN.. Southwest N11,0,01111 State College. S1)111100,1 65802 . I') 1-73 /,/e( t Ntar )I leinek.lse, I awrente Cm% Appleton. Wis 5491 1 1973-7i 16 DGWS TENNISBADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE Fran Ramsei, Roanoke ( ollege, Salem, Va 24153 . 1972.74

Flag Football Mar Grave Colby Umv of Santa ( lara, Santa Clara,alit 95053 1972-74

Golf Andrea Hauge, Rte1,I_ oLkhal.en, Pa. 17745 ...1972-74 Gymnastics 1 u %kallace. (Ingham )oung nny Provo, Utah 84601 1971-73

Lacrosse Agnes 131%ler, Sunny IhIls, lodsessm, Del 19707 1972-74 Outing Activities %ladled 1 omen, Indiana Stale Vim Ierre Haute 47802 . 1971-73

Soccer Dolores Faber, Nassau Community College,

Garden City, N V. 11533 . . 1972-74

Softball I)otothy I)ohie. Marylhursi College,

klarylimiNLOre 97206 . 1972-74

Speedball haihaia Fundy. Montrose High School, Montrose. Midi 48457 ...... , . 1972-74 Squash Marigold Idwaids, Univ. of Pittsbuigh,

Pittsburgh, Pa. 15213 . 1972-' Tennis Painkia Suleiman, Slate Univ. of

Iowa CO 52240 , 1972-74

SPORTS GUIDES AND OFFICIAL RULES COMMITTEE 17 Track and Field Downs 'flionipson, Um): of I Ionolulii 96822 1971-74 Volleyball by nne Higgins, Illinois Stat.( niv Normal 61761 . 1971--3

Winter Sports

Joanne Washburn. Washington State , Pullman 99163 (971-73 ADVISORY

Past Chairmar. Betty Brown. William and Mao, ( ()liege, Williamsburg, 2318.5

Officiating Services Area Representative Lhte( obb. North Feas State I , Denton 3

Consultant Mao hRekstad, AMIN R, 1201 loth St W Washington, I) (' 20036 Staff Editor Constance (;.I acey, AAIIPF R. 120116th St , N 11 Washington, D.0 20036

18 DGWS TENNIS-BAOMINTONSQUASH GUIDE ASSOCIATION FOR INTERCOLLEGIATE ATHLETICS FOR WOMEN 1972.73

Officers

( ARM' A O(,11 SRN'. Prt %rdent, Purdue Om,11 1,it.ie11e, Ind 47907 (' ARO' I GORDON. Presuleni-elet t,11.) \ billet on State limy Pullman. Wash 9'7163 I A UR M A 131Z ('oordrriator at A at Ruralliampimohipsilh mots State Unt Normal III 61761 DI ILA DURAN I, treasurerI'cnnti)Isanla State Ulm, Untersit Palk. l'a16802 KA) L MCDONALD, i1111101 OileiZe Rem esentam C um- munit ( ()lit ge Mesa. An! 55201

ASSOCIATION FOR INTERCOLLEGIATE ATHLETICS FOR WOMEN 19 DGWS TENNIS COMMITTEE' 1970.1972 \IA RM.\ Chairman, 35 Hale) RdMarblehead Mass 61945 JOANNA DAVI NPOR l'Past Chairman. Uralsof Illinois Urbana. 19 61801 \ NI rA BLANK, ('oll)) Jr College, New London N.I1 03257 LARON ('ROW. Skidmore College, Saratoga Springs, N Y. 12866 KARI NMI la, 331 Ry burn Ave.. Da, ton, Ohio 45405 CAROL FRI.NCII, Fast I ligh fkhool. Lincoln. Neb. 68500 131 VI RLY JOHNSON, Pa,adena College,Pasadena, Calif 91100 L IN DA MLCKII.SSF L. 2113 Kanawha Ave, Charleston, W.Va 25304 CAROL PI UNCK1-11 , Um \of Rhode Island, Kingston, R 102_881 ?ATRI('1A Sill RMAN, Ulm of Iowa IowaCity, Iowa 52240 MILDRI1) WFS , William and Mar)CollegeWilliamsburg, Va 23:85

Advisory Members 131 fllBROWN,I csui late (11th) man, Spot ts Guides and Official Rules ( onumtteesCollege of\\ ilham and !dal), \\. ilhamsburg, Va 2318s CUR LY NI AL, 1 c was 0 I I au! t mg I; so on nations a nd Ratings()m- ini! ! cc. SI anfoi d l ms., Stanloid, Cali! 94305 CA1111- RINI A. WILKINSON, him y>lc andTe< h s 0(J,, la 1 mg Pe rims Committee,North1 !mil School. Phoenix, Aniona 85014 131 LM AR GUNDbR SON, DG WSRc7nl serail! irc to I T4 It',/men", Cfilh siat(om mit tee. 1824 Ruddell, Apt 101. Denton, I ex 76201

pared hs 1970 1972 Committee

20 DGWS TENNISBADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE OGWS TENNIS COMMITTEE' 1972.1974 PA I RICIA ANN SIII R MAN, Chauman, l ms of lotto losa ('it) 52240 MAR MIA K \1(;11 1,Past Chauman. 35 Haley Rd., Marblehead, Mass 01945 \ N VAHNI1\1, Brigham Young Um%I'roso Utah 84601 L 1VONNI FILIUCK, R mona State College, Winona, Minn 55087 (;RI I CHIA KUL !ILI R, Gustas us Adolphus Collge, Sand Peter Minn 5608' VIRGINIA LOI1M 1 LL1 R West High S.hool, Dasenpoi t, Iowa 13ARB I O( KI ARL . Iemplc Glenside, Pa 10122 JILL BLACKWOOD, Bo' 317, Ileilong.alit 06113 NI A RY 111.1,1 N SN111.1 1% Nol th Dakota, Grand forks 58201 CAROL I MIS, Wheaton (.filial High Ss hool NVheaton III. 60187 Silh RYE GO I rs. N,.,,iintlatn,n state um, ',unman 90163 SI IA RON VAN ari.GuiN. Indiana Urns' , Bloomington 47401

Advisory Members

JOANNA DAVI:NMI( I, Isoniite Chapman, Sports Guides and OttiLial Rules Committees. Gins of Illinois Urbana 61801 CLAUDIA GIACONIIN /mus (Mu/a/mg Ltd/az/lawns and Ratings Commutee Sequoia High SLhool, Redwood ('it). Calif 90263 AN NI' prir [MAN. Pim/ /pies and 'It (lnatics ,t1 Opusaiing Tennis (omanttee. Arirona State Ili Tempe 85281 131.1 MAR GUN RSON,Di; WSRep/eve/,t/a to CSI.T.,1 Women's ( ollegratc Commotte. 1824 Ruddell Apt101, Denton, 1 e \ 76201

'Material lor 1974 1976 (;tode 101)e prepared In 1972 1974 Committee

DGWS TENNIS COMMITTEE 21 Tennis Courtesy

LUELL WEED GUTHRIE and LINDA ELLIOTT

4 lawn heed Guthriereceired her11,S faire, of degree pont the Inn m Seattle, and her ,11...1degree from the Teachers College of Columbialinnet say, New }'wk Car Sheisit?,as so late mojessor and pastchairman of the Department 01l'Insual1 du(ation JotWomen, Stanford 1'nirersits,Stanford,('alijolnia/Itennis instructor since 1931,she was the firstrecipient of the Woman's Tennis Leadership Award presented bythe USLTA in 1969. A recent graduate of theOnversay of CahOrma, Berkeley, it7th a major in math andminor in physical education, Linda ilium is a teaching Intel,:at Moreau High School, Ilasstard, Califolnia, She will bean official AAU hostess for the United States Olympic teamsto Munich the summer of 1972

the following suggestions classes. are for use in school and college tennis It is important to know the official rules of tennis andthen play by the Official USLTATournament Rules and Regulations Courtesy should be extendedto your opponent(s) as well as to your partner in doubles and to officials During a match withan umpire, abide by the decision of the umpire graciously and withoutcomment. If you were uncertain of any calls or decisions. ask foran interpretation alter the match I3e sure to thank the umpire and linesmenfor officiating. When there is noumpire, the players must conduct the match accordance with USLTA Rules, in which means that each playermust take on the duties ofa linesman and scorekeeper. When you are yourown linesman, your obligations include calling all balls on your side of only the net. Ilelp your opponent witha decision ifrequested. Any ballthatyou opponent's side, you clearly see out on the must call against yourself, whethershe has asked your opinionor not. (An exception is the whena serve in doubles becomes the iecewer's partner'sresponsibility to help call the boundary lines of theservice court). As server you should keep the each point accurately and robully after When starting a match,introduce yourself to your opponent you do not know her. if 22 DGWS TENNISBADMINTONSQUASHGUIDE

4fr 4 Offer to spin y our (Mser to determine (II the right to be server recer:er, or (2) the chooser of the side Fhe winner of the spin has the right to choose one of these two options. Akays, but especially when beginning a game, sail until itis obvitri, that your opponent Is Ratty to recene the lust serve A "quick serLemayresultin your opponent asking fola "let IloweLer, it she returns or tries to return the ball, she cannot then claim that she was not ready (Rule II ) the !umlaut( is one violation that cannot be called in the absence ofa linesman or umpire (Rule 7). 'Hie person who foot faults is taking advantage of her opponent The tairnunded person will break herselfofa habitual toottaultinpracticebyasking others to obserLt her servethe person rho toottaults knowingly is cheating and is careless and unfau. Once a ball is returned, the opponent may assume that the ball is good,Therefor:.toreturn a servethatisobL [(misty outis unnecessary, unless tile return cannot be avoided. in which ca -out- should be called immediately. Calls of -out- and -let- should be made instantly. as a delay or doubtful call implies that it was not seen clearlyA ball thatyou cannot Lan -out" is presumed good In any e,,,,ent, do not claim -let- because you did not see the ballAny doubts must be resolved in favor of your opponent. Donotqneshon opponent'scallunlessasked,Asky our opponent's opinion when she is in a better position to see the ball than you. Do not enlist the aid of a spectator You may think the spectator is qualified, but your opponent may not Distracting your opponent by intentionally saving your racket or your arms, or making noise is not courteous Your opponent is entitled to a replay if exclamations are made during the course ofplay. llowever, she must ask for a replay immediately, not later, after she has lost the point You must volunteer honestly against yourself such violations as double-hit, double-bounce, ball touching your body or clothing, touching the net, and reaching over the net ( Rule 18). Courtesy in Doubles Play The receiver's partner should call the service line, and the receiver together with her partner sirtald call the center and sidelines of the service court If one partner calls the ball good and the other calls It out. the point goes to the opponents As doubt has been raised, itis not up to the two partners to come to an agreement. In the course of theplay, there should be no conversation betweenpartners except briefand supple instructions, such as "mine," "out," -run," etc TENNIS COURTESY 23 Bolster the morale of }our doubles partner h a kind wIrd it sikeessi%e errors are made. Snide' Do not glare atour p, rtner ( ()operate with her as she wants to win is much asOtt do

Court Courtesy When fluidics are being played on adnuning courts, extend the 'ame courtesies to sour neighbors thaton would wain totourself Do not retne% e sour hall front or behind the adjoining L mats while PldIs In progressDo not ask tot sour ball or return a ball to adloming .otitis while pia} is In progress Return a %kande' ing ball to the serer of the match each time. 1 he .erect should sa "thank oil rot return of ball to her When sarong for a court. let it he known thaton would like to /Ad.!, next aim the pi,* els'setis (unshedThen leinin on th sidelines until the plaers .are finished without dist ratting them Al the end of the set, he sure to gike tipour court Io tho,,e waitingoritthi tois t timeregulation%,pite% our out 1111111ethatelS when the time period is up

Tournament Courtesy

Know the I.`-)II A I emus Plding Rules thorough:} Dress fittoiding to the .lob's or pla mg 'S titles I, se .1tennis rat itet glIald on Meta] to present taping Court surtaLcs Re !unkindd for pia}. OthL twp, on ma} he kiLfulted or died for stalling. the titles on ctalluis;are concerned %kith See Rule 30I ot explanation.) exi.essne time being taken in arming atthe match to he pl.a}rd exLessRe warn -up, more than live minutes of tune posted at desk !nosing at ',JIM, speed between points excessivetimein-tow. 1,1 we en gamestauunt one minute) extra time at the end of the fist set that ends on -stn piths seiver waiting at the net while Nu:vie! aetrieses boll unnecess.n, disLussion breath dela} 111 clearing balls from the court between serves stopping to std}hair, tie shoes, (At , when olwiousl, stalling tot time lake all practice sows hetore match ottitlanse stmt. and this Means all lour pla ets tit doubles Noy must he continuous 110111 stall of Mist seise ( Rule 30) 24 DGWS TENNISBADMINTONSQUAS!-4 GVIDF Players may not accept coaching during the pi ogress of the match. At no time shout.' they consult parents, friends, coach, or spectators If Itis necessary for a player to request quiet of an audience, it should be done in a courteous manner and through an umpire. If no umpire or referee is present, players should wait until they change sides of the net and enlist the aid of opponent(s) in quietly and politely requesting more peace and quiet

Spectator Courtesy Accept the umpire's decision dining an ()inclined match. Accept players'decisions,itno umpireDo not become an unofficial umpire. Spe, tal ins must show consideration for the players by asoiding distiactinl. movement and loud oonversation while a pointis in progress Do not ask foi the sco.until scones detei mined after a point. Do not move around, change seats, rattle paper, leave the court area or wave at other spectators during a point

Do not enter the court of < < .1, across or behind a court until a game is completed Do not leave court area or change seats during play; wait until players are changing sides of the court All spectators, including parents, friends, or coaches, should be courteous also."I his means no solunteering advice on line calls, scoring, or the conduct of the match, white playis in progress. Comments may only be made during the official rest petiod that is allowed between second and third sets (only after third set for men). Be courteous at all times, whether you win or lose and you will be sought Ate'asasocial-,pponent,partner, or entrantin tournamentsGracious participation is the basis for good terms games.

TENNIS COURTESY 25 Doubles Positioning for Beginners

ANN READ

.l nn Read recelved her B A. and 11./1(tepees from (hapman College, Orange. (triamma Sheto ts he's and «,a( lies tennis at Ifullettin Junior ('allege to tulhiton. tolma Shewasthe 9- 1.1 (i2Is mu\t hats man1,0the Southern Calijmnia Com- m mitt Colleges

Bet.auNe ofthe oh sousdifferencesin court site, number of plaers, positioning and stiatep., the doubles game is quite different from singles Although singles ply obviousl,.ploys( es more opportunities for 1)1:girlies- to practice stiokestheir are (MIMI( ,l(hr,l111,1gCN 101 gaining experience in (101,4blo, playHie game of doubles not only placess premium oni good first serve but It also gees', the student a chance to practice the volley in a gamesituation which could lead to a more aggressive Nil game Often a %ceaker or slower player will be a better doubleplayer than singles pla) er because of good strategy and positit rang m.Inch can compensate tos theabsence of great skill

Individual Positioning and Play A doubles team can functionmost et fectnelyiteach player places herself in the most athantageousposition front %%huh she can tmentl) cover hen portion of the court

Server Se/t positron.The seler should serve trotha spot within a few feet of the bisection of the singles side boundaryand he baseline Figure I) From this positt,n she willhave best return coverage for her section of the court. Sc ving fromnearer the side boundary also lessens the chance of hitt. ,g her partnerat the net with her serve :.lore important to the beginning player.however, is that serving from this position makes the servicecoast slider in the center and diesel)y easier to serve to than the longersummer court for a serve from the center mark t Figure hi/porta/us' of the se/reIn doubles itis vital that the fist serve be ''in.'' A successful first surer gives theserver a psychological advantage b) taking the pressure off the server and puttingit onto the receiver. In addition, not outs do service faults lead to lostgames 26 DGWS TENN.S- BADMINTON- SQUASH GUIDE Key S Serve' SP Server's Partner R Receiver RI' Receiver's Partner ( 5 ) , *9/

(-5P-I

RP f t

RIP S

S Singles 'C R I) Doubles

I \ Figure 2 Wider angle Figure 1Court positions of serve butfrequent doublefaults also have a tendency to break the concentration of all four players on the court Depth of serve is equally important because the majority of the outright winning shots in doubles are made from the net position, therefore, the receiver should be forced deep into the backcourt to make the service return. A serve with depth makes it more difficult for the receiver to come to the net as contrasted with the ease of coming to the net off a shallow seive Reducing double faults When a player faults a serve, she should be encouraged to breaktheineffective movement pattern by bouncing a ball between serves and mentally going over the collect movement pattern.

Partner of the Server Position at net.Thepartner of the server stands six to nine feet from the net (Figure I). Any player who is a poor volleyer should stand closer to the net. being sure to assume a good ready position. She should align herself oppositethereceive' and in: intainthis alignment with the receiver as she moves from side to sidewithin her halfof the court (Figure 3). This should maximize her chances of intercepting the service retuin.

DOUBLES POSITIONING FOR BEGINNERS 27 Receiver Reeemng position,the re,etver should align herself opposite the server by sighting along an imaginary line fromthe center of the service court to the server (Figure 4). Shemust be ready to adjust her distance in relation to theservite line according to the depth of the serve. If the receiver watches theserver's initial Will in-op serves, she can %intik:matethe depth of the wive andposition herself accordingly. \ \ \ \ SPsp s

R.

I Figure 3 Moving with receiver Figure 4. Receiver lining up withserver ,Sett ice returns.There are many possibleservice returns. however a cross -court drive or lob seem to work bestfor the beginner A cross-court driveisthe easiest service return and also themost frequent used, accounting for 93(;; ofall rturns.I Since the net is lowerin the center, this type of return succc stud. is more likely to be When returning a serve from the forehandcourt, inure advanced ph yers should try to lob over thenet player (Figure 5). A lob from th s position folLes a right-handedplayer into a high backhand stroke return

partner of the Receiver Court position.'I he partner of the receiver shouldstand on the service line midway between the center line and thesingles side boundary (Figure I ). From thisposition she can help her partner by calling any long serve faults, Itis the receiver's responsibility to (tall any wide service faults as she has a better'new of the two side boundary lines of the service court, 28 DGWS TENNISBADMINTON-SQUASH GUIDE This positionallows the ieceiver's partner to adjust10the receiver's movement -a the service return Following a cross-court return awa} from the net player, the receiver's partner should move to the net and assume a position opposite her opponent Ilowever, if the receiver returns the ball toward the net player, she must stayon the service line to cover a possible cross-court volley

Teamwork With two people covering a court only one-third larger than that normally covered by one player, the essence of doubles strategyis the two players working together to at taman offensive count position, There are three types of doubles coverage from which to gain this advantage. up and back, side by side, and a combination of the two

Up and Back The up and back team positionis normally assumed by both teams before every serve is delnered (Figure 6)Fach player is responsibleforatriangular-shaped section of the court which changes according to the opponent's iyIf an opponent lobs over the "up" player, the "back" player justmoves to the opposite corner of the baseline to play the lob while the "up" player moves to the opposite side of the court, changing sections. Adrantager and diradvantager, This is the easiest type of doubles teamwork for the beginner as it requires less changing of positions by both players. However, since most of the ot.trightwinning points in doubles are made from within the forecourt, having only one member of the team in an "up" position is weak offensively

Side by Side Side by side positioning is just what itsnames implies' two players cover the court parallel to each other,as if connected by a string (Figure 6). When one player moves forwardor goes back, her partner adjusts accordingly. Admntager and duadrantages. More offensive thanup and back, side by side teamwork allows both players to bein the forecourt at the same time. However, the type of court coverage ismore difficult because it necessitates more movement and alsorequires that both players volley, serve, and rush the net well. Itcan become defensive if the opponents have strong lobs to force the teamto retieat to the baseline.

DOUBLES POSITIONING FOR BEGINNERS 29 Up and Back 5

i

e . x Figure 1 Serve retu ns Side by Side

Figure 6. Doubles teamwork

Combination Most players begin with tip and back positioning on the serve and try to work toward a side by side position. This "combination" type of teamwork utilizes the best aspects of the other two: the intial up and back positioning isheld until an offensive volley or deep approach shot gives the "back" player an opportunity to come up to the net to the "side" of her partner.

Conclusion The game of doubles in tennis can be a very enjoyable as well as rewarding experience as good positioning can enhance the effective- ness of each player's strokes resulting in increascd appreciation for the game itself,

' WilliamTalbertandBruceOlds,The Genieof Doubles inTennu (Philadelphia: J.B. Lippincott Co., 1962), p. 67. 30 DGWS TENNISBADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE Task Method of Teaching Tennis

ELIZABETH PETRAK1S

Llizabeth Petrakis, assistant professor of physical education for women at the University of Nebraska. Lincoln, received her 11 S. degree from Wisconsin State University, Lacrosse and her M S.degreefromSmith College,Northampton, Massachusetts. She is the chairman of the tennis andad- mutton programs at the University of Nebraska. Tennis "is a many-splendor d thing." Itis rhythmic motion, synchronized action, speed. accuracy. and exhilaration. But, to enjoy tennis, one must learn tc play, and acquiring skill in tennis is not a simple matter. Since success stimulates effort, the teacher of tennis is searching constantly for teaching approaches that will reach the individuals in her classes. With this purpose in mind, the task method of teaching tennis is presented. The teacher has a variety of approaches that may be used in teachingtennis.Inallclasses,therearelimitations such as equipment, space, time, class size, and tnkill of the students. The greatest challenges the teacher faces are the class to meet all abilitylevelsinskillandproviding , dportunity for the development of skill. The teacher must deci,,e what approach can best work in a given situation. An approach commonly used is the command method.

Command Method In the command approach of teaching tennis, the teacher givesan explanation and then expects the students to mimic or respondin the correct movement pattern. The teacher stimulates the student by giving him an exact command. The initiative for the learning is given by the teacher who rigidly controls all the variables and standards of performance.

Task Method Another approach for teaching tennis is called the task method. In the task method, the teacher may give the instruction and explain the tasks to be performed. The students are free to explore these tasks. The studentis self-directed, thus allowing for individual differences and skill abilities. Once the task is accomplished, the student is presented additional tasks. TASK METHOD OF TEACHING TENNIS 31 Tasks may be simple to complex. quantitativeor qualitative. written or performed. but they should be governed by the objective., of the course When tasks are being used, thereare three approaches to class orgamiatton. ( mass, (2) ability levels within a class. and (3) individual programming. Mass Level. In the mass level, one task may be presented toa (lass at a time. For example, a task to develop eye-hand coordinationIs demonstrated by bouncing the ball from the racket into theair 50 times continuously without an error. The students must try topass this task before moving onto the next one. llowevet, the student has the option of moving on to the next task butmust continue to try passing the previous task. This method was tried tn the Waukesha. Wisconsin public schools. The students workedon four tasks simple in nature Since court space was limited. a testing wall was setup. The tasks were to develop the forehand drive, the backhanddrive. continuous rally using forehand or backhand drives, and theservice, The students practiced the skills until they couldpass the test or the course ended. The sooner the tasks were passed. the sooner the students were placed in a game situation. Skill Level. If the class has a range of abilities, the teachermay want to group the students according to skill levels The teacher would then provide tasks for eachgroup which would both meet their needs and challenge them, Eve F. Kraft (2) has developeda series of workbooks that may be used by the students. Unit Iis for beginners and advanced beginners whileUnitIIisfor intermediate and advanced players.These workbooks containskillprogressions. exerinses, rules and terminology. Again the students are free to work at individual levels and progress at their own rate of speed. 'I he UnitedStates Lawn Tennis Association (5) also has Ists for beginners to advanced players which may be used for certification. If the student passes a level in tennis, a certification cardmay be given to him, which is similar to the Red Cross s miming program. Individual Level. The third area in task organizationis individual programming. The students arc tested when they enter the class and are placed into the program attheir specific level. I.ach student works on his own to achieve maximum skill. The learningis self-directed and without any formal Instruction. At the presenttime the Nebraska public schools in Omaha are studying thistype of learning. labeled the Phy-Pak, in several areas of physicaleducation (a). 1 lie student has reading matenal and audiovisual aids touse for his instructions, The student practices the task and when lie feelshe lias learned the task, he goes to one of his peers or a student assistant to see if he is doing the task correctly. One example of a task is to return four or five balls which are tossed to the student. lle must return them using the forehand stroke and having the ballsgo over the net and land within the boundary of the court. If the peer okays 32 DGWS TENNISBADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE the task, the student then goes to the teacher for final approval. If the teacher does not pass the student. the student must try again. lie then must read further, watch the films and practice. When one task is accomplished, he moves on to another Written queries are given and the student must pass the test with a predetermined score, or he repeats the test, fins continues through the entire course of tennis. Task assignments may be used for evaluating and grading the students. !he teacher is the main source of evaluation. She may have student assistants or paraprofessionals trained to assist her in the testing.Partners may he used Itthe tasks are simple in nature. Self-testing can be used if these tasks are not used for grading. Students decide when t hey have learned the task. Thew is a danger, however. that they may overrate their performance ifgrading is invohed.

Disadvantages of Task Method '!'hereare two drawbacks to the task method of teaching First. one may find the student who lacks motivation or who shies away from the testing situation or feels that he is not ready to be testedIt is necessary for the teacher to reinforce the idea that the ,tudent may keep trying to pass the task without penalty.I act] tune the student attempts a task, the highest score achieved rs recolded by the teacher 1 he second disadvantage would be teacher boredom. Alter the instructionalmaterialhasbeen presented, thet cachet 'smain responsibilityis testing the studentsIt this is done hour after hum, the teacher may reach a level of mental fatigue. Fach day may become very routine and monotonous.

Advantages to Task Method There are several advantagesin the task method of teaching tennis Fach student knows exactly w hat he must accomplish. Ile works athis own rate of learning and tries to advance achievementlescl.AttheUniversityof Nebraska-I incoln.this method has been used in maim and set vice tennis classes.Ilse students commented that they enjoyed this method because they could see an improvement in their own skills and knew what would be expected as evaluation. I he Waukesha and Omaha public schools noted that theme were fewer discipline problems This was probably because the students were self-directed, which increased their motivation. Hie toaclung was individualued so a beginner did notfeel he was compc ding against an advanced student. 'Ike advanced student was motivated lo improve his skills and was not bored with material he had aheadv mastered. TASK METHOD OF TEACHING TENNIS 33 ar

In the use of this method, the teacher is free to circulate and give individual help. When the teacher is testing each student, immediate analysis and suggestions can be given. In the command method, a teacher may miss the student who needs the greatest assistance. Each teacher is an individual as is each student in her class. The teacher's knowledge, ability and personality determwe her success in teaching. Therefore, very few teachers use the sa;.,e method of teaching tennis successfully.In examining the task method of teaching tennis, the class may be individualized for each student and the student may progress at his own rate of speed to acquire the skills and knowledges of tennis. Success in skill leads to participation and enjoyment of the game of tennis.

REFERENCES

1. CONROY, JOAN JThe Tennis Workbook. Unit 11for Inter- mediate and Advanced Players, Englewood Chffs, N.J. 07632 Scholastic Coach Book Service, Inc., 1969. 2. KRAFT, EV F. The Tennis' Workbook. Unit 1for Beginners and Advanced Beginners, Englewood Cliffs, N.J. 07632 Scholastic Coach Book Service, Inc., 1969. 3. MAR IANI, TIIOMAS J..4 Comparison of the Elle( nrelle. of the Command Method andtheTask Method ofTeaching the Forehand and Backhand Tennis Strokes.- Research Quarterly 41 171.174, May 1970. 4. MOSSTON MUSK A.Teailung Ph) szialEducationfrom Command to Dm overy. Columbus. OhioCharles1..Merrill Publishing Co., 1966. 5. USLTA. USLTA Official Achievement Test and Certificates. Fhe United States Law 'I ennis Association, 51 East 42nd Street, New York, N.Y. 10017. 6. SII RA DE R, ROBERT D. "Individualized A pproach to Learning." Journal of Health, Physical Education, Recreation 4233-36. Septembci 1971.

34 DGWS TENNIS-BADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE Observational Learning in Tennis

JOHN W. SANTROCK

John Santrockishead tennis coach at the Unirersity of Minnesota and head tennis' professional at the Charleston Tennis Club, Charleston, West Virginia, Ile is a five-tune West Virginia State Men's Tennis Champion and played on the Unirercity of Miami, NCAA Runner-UpIntercollegiate Tennis Team, While at Minnesota. he is finishing his doctoral work in experimental child psychology. Recently I gave a tennis lesson to a physician's wife. Following the lesson, the husband remarked that he was surprised I had used mostly punishment rather than reward during the lesson, particularly sinceI was a psychologist. My immediate thought was. "If she had hit any balls even remotely correctly, perhaps I would have rewarded her!" Ilowever, his comment stayed with me. It reveals how even a tennis instructor trained in psychology can benefit from consciously being reminded of the principles of learning. For instance, the lady who was told she aiways was doing something wrong when she hit the tennis ball probably did not have pleasant .houghts about the lesson, and likely would have performed better if the instructor had emphasised the positive aspects of her game. However, since tennis involves complex learning processes, the concept of reinforcement is inadequate and too simple to explain how an individual should be taught. Each person collies to a tennis lessonwith unique perceptual-motor coordination andathletic experience.I aking this into account, the instructor can see how rapidly he can .introduce new concepts, or how repeatedly he must state a basic prriciple, such as stepping forward with the left foot simultaneously with the swing of the racket on the forehand for a right-handed player. The poorly coordinated, inexperienced player will require hours of drills on such a co,.,_; t. and still may never perfectthetiming, whereasthewellcoordinated, experienced athlete may develop the synchronisation of the step and swing in two or three minutes, Tran.sler of Training,In terms of past athletic experiences helping an individual to play tennis, we arc talkin about positive transfer of training. There also are negative carryovers to tennis from some sports: these are labeled negative transfer of training. For instance. people who have played golf for many years and then take up tennis OBSERVATIONAL LEARNING IN TENNIS 35 usually shift their weight with theswing of the racket in a low arc past their feet with head dropped and then endthe follow-through high on the forehand. Actually, the pathof the racket should be more level, past the waist, with the racket headeven with the wrist when it passes the waist. Age of Learner. The developmental psychologistalso would argue that the age of the person should be takeninto account. The young child's attention span is considerablyshorter than the adolescent's, and he cannot retain informationas well. Furthermore, the young child's perceptual -motor coordinationisnotasrefinedas the adolescent's or young adult's, and also thechild is not strong enough to foll'w through firmly on his groundstrokes. Hence, it would be ridiculous to orate five orsix basic principles of the forehand and thenexpectaseven-year-oldto implement themFor young children, the instructor wisely wouldfocus on one or at most two basic principles during a lesson, suchas getting the racket back quickly on the forehand, Playing Ability of Teacher. Somevery knowledgeable people in tennis have commented that a good teacherdoes not have to be a good player However, the teacherwho is a good player hasa distinct advantage over the instructor whois not. This is so because of the principles of observationallearning. If the instructor tells his pupils to stroke the ball smoothly andflatly, then the students see the teacher's jerky chop shots, theinstruction piobabldoesn't make much of an impacton the learner.

Observational Learning Of all of the ways the person hasavailable to hint to become a tennisplayer, none serves 111111 as efficientlyas imitation or observational learning. A person probablywill fail miserably if he only reads books on tennis and/orlistens to lectures on tennis. Own attempts to incorporate these conceptsinto his tennis game. On the other hand, he will have a vivid,accurate impression of how to hit the tennis ball accurately if he watchesoutstanding players or a competent professional instructor andscrutinizes such aspects of their game as. footwork, follow-throughs,how they punch the ball on the volley, how they hit the ball in front oftheir body, and where they toss the ballon the serve. I learned how to hit a twist serve with no instruction other than closelyobserving the mechanics of the swing, ball toss, wristaction, and body position of a player known to have a good twistserve. Of course, many laborious hours of practice were necessary to perfect theserve. Since observational learningis so critical in learning to play tennis, the makeup of observationallearning needs to be discussed. The following ideas are basedon the comprehensive account of 36 DGWS TENNIS-BADMINTON-SQUASH GUIDE observational learning by 13anduia.1 Obseranonal learning consists ofthreebasic componentsattention,retention, andmotor- reproduction processes. Attention Piocesses. Simply exposing the tennis player to the modeled shot does not guarantee that the player will attend to the shot, perceive it correctly, or pick out the correct points Attention to the modeled stimuli may be controlled by incentive conditions, observercharacteristics, and piopernes ofthe cues themselves Physical properties of the cues such as intensity. sire, vividness, and novelty Influence attention. Models who are purpoited experts and who have demonstrated competence will likely elicit more attention thanmodels who have notFor instance, Rod Laver would command more attention at a tennis clinic than Sammy Slide The affecuvity of amodel also influences the leaf fling process. The warm, considerate instructor conveys a positive, anxiety - seduced climate fot the learner, win:leas the harsh, cold instiuctoi will Inhibit the learning process Observational learning can be augmented by the use of appro- priate incentivesIf 41 person is informed beforehand that be will be expected to reproduce the elements of the model's behavior and be rewarded for the number correctly reproduced, he probably will attend more closely than the person presented the same modeled event5 without any predisposition to observe and to learn them. The rate, number, distribution, and complexityof modeling stimuli that observers are exposed to influence the acquisition of modeled responses The observer's capacity to process information places limits on the number of modeling cues that can be learned during a single exposure Repeated presentations may be necessary to develop adequate matching of the learner's responses to the model's.

Retention ProcessesSofar I have men'ioned onlyfactors Involved in the sensory registration and coding of stunull Another basic component of observational learning involves the retention of modeled eventsIn order to reproduce the model's behavior in the model's absence, the learner must retain the original observational mput in sonic type of symbolic form. Of the many variables which mfluence the learner's memory of the model's behavior, rehearsal probably is the most important Through practice, or ovet rehearsal of modeled behavior, the retention of such behavior is enhanced Furthermore, periodic reproduction of modeled segments of be- havior is better than lengthy, passive obsetvanon of behavior.

Albert Bandura, Prtneiples nJ Beltimor Modtpeatron. (Ness YorkHolt, Itineliartind Winston. 969). OBSERVATIONAL LEARNING IN TENNIS 37 Milk» Reproduction Ptocecs rate and level of observa- tional learningIscontrolled extensively by theavailability oi motor responsesObservers 1kho lack some of the will reproduce onl} part 01 necessary coh.ponents the model's behavior Modeledresponses alsomaybe acquiredin representational form but cannot be reproduced because of physical the spectator snatches Rod limitation, No matter how closely able to rein oduce Laver's backhand overhead, he won'tbe Furthermore. tennis isa highly coordinated motor skill in winch the person cannot observemany of the responses he is making and musttherefore rely upon proprioceptive feedbackcuesConse- quently, hours and hours ofovert practice are necessary in addition to the guidance of a proficientmodel feedback is so important Because piopilocepiive in learning the relation 01 the ball toyour body and the racket. theperson should be urged to hit thousands of balls from one lesson to the swing as the person hits next New mistakes may occurin the many balls without the instructorpresent, but the importance of learningthe relation of the ball to the racket and body as ittravels at different speeds andbounces to different heights far outweighs thenew bad habits the leaner might develop The learner's active, repetitivepractice of the instructor's tips also IScrucial because the person has to eventually learn how to hita tennis ball without thinking As theball approaches, the player simply does not have timeto think, "Racket back, arm relaxed, body sideways, racket head level,step, and follow-through. As he practices, the learner should thinkabout one of these principlesat a time and practice one at a tune. thengradually blend them into his game to complete the perfection ofa stroke Of course, thinking of many principlesofthemechanics of a approaches can be harmful stroke while the ball I have found that two practiceswings on a stroke. then without stopping. a third swing as anotherperson easily tosses or hits the ball do wonders for the person's learningThis is so because sucha dull grooves the learner's muscles in a particulartiming and path so that he doesn't have to thinktoo much about the mechanics 01 stroke when the ball approaches the

38 DGWS TENNISBADMINTON-SQUASHGUIDE The Tennis Drive Skills Test'

GERALYN J. SHEPARD

Geralin Shepaid, an instruc for and tennis coach at Pasaduia Citj('allege,rc«,ried he,masters (levee from California State College, Los Angeles Puipose of the test1 here are only a few skills tests designed to evaluate a subject's pet-tor:nal ce .A1 hitting tennis drives from an appioaclung ballI ests should be as nearly like the game situation as possible The strokes or returns in a tennis game are made from an approaching ballrherefore, the purpose of this test is to measure the ability of the performer to stroke a tossed ball low to the net and deep into the backcourt Description of the test.ILe test consists of 14 forehand foals and 14 backhand trialsteach subtect Is allowed 5 practice trials on both the forAand and backhand strokes 1.quipment needed

1 A regulation net and tennis court with speclal court markings (Figure 1) 2 A restraining rope stretched tour feet, four inches directly above and parallel to the net 3 One racket and 14 new balls for each station 4 A scorecard for each subject .nd pencils The TestThe studentt thing the test stands in back of the baseline directly behind the c, nter mark in ready position When the ball is tossed to the target circle, the hitter moves into position to drive the tossedball over the net and deep into the opposite backcourtthe tosser ',tang,' in front of the net, directly opposite the targetcircle,indtossesthe ball underhand inafatrlyflat trajectory so that first bounce of the ball is in the code. The tosser must be certain that the hitter is in a good ready position before tossing the ball The hitter should not swing at bad tosses or at any tosses that are made when she is not readyIf the hittei swings at a had toss, that trial is counted

'Gently') 3. Shepard, "I he Shepard Modification of the BroerMiller fermis Drive Shills lest." Master's thesis, California State College at Los Angeles. June 1969 THE TENNIS DRIVE SKILLS TEST 39 ".4"

EXPLANATION OF SYMBOLS 2 40 -1 ® 4 0,f -PEf'f - 6

- 1

6 a 4

'.F 0EI .0 44 2 44 1.(,),E Er.I OF.4,E LT TOE El E 'NE TC4 'EP P v,i *HE ..E" X 4%0 IE_ C, , r , .1 PE a ,E

0 TAP ,E" R, I e O A :4'7:-4"-:,;'1E.:E.:,14::IT,"(..,')'AL,,,AfE,ER

A A tHErF 4,1w1,14 "OF 44.34.k-41%4 ,V,TEE TI/' r ENTER MARY

Figure 1Diagrari of the testing court

40 DGWS TENNISBADNIINTON SQUASH GUID* Total Forehand Score Score Backhand Fence 2 Fence .12 6- 64 Ls' Cc - 68 E in 24 6' z Net Figure 2 Scored scorecard Net ScoringI ach tnal number is market: on the scorecard diagrain in the same lelatiNt position as the ball lands on the courtIf ore ball goes over the le, training rope, that trial number is circled After the student ha, completed thetest, the scores for the toiehand and backhand are cJicu latedIfthe ball goes over the rope, that trial scores one-Lal: the value of the area in which the ball landsI he total score is the sum of 14 forehand trials and 14 backhand trials (See Scored Scorecard, Figure 2 \dimm ,:ration of the test

1 The recorder and tosser for each station arc selet ted and given prior instructions and practice 2 In addition to the recorder and tosser, tour or five students are assignedtoeachstation besubject,therope judge and retrievers. These tour or Ilse students rotate positions after each subject has completed all trials for both the forehand and the hat k hand 1 lie .isnuctor adds the scores to insure accuracy of scoring and addition Stuns/milnull sitI he test was administered to three groups of college age (or older) womenNAho scored as Iollows

Sul nda, a G tulip A um bet :1 Ica n Deviation

Beginning 68 70 96 21 31 Intermediate 19 105 37 15 26 Advanced 12 176.08 12 57 Rdtabila I The correlationforthe sums of the odd and even-numbered trials was ,S4 When the Speannan-Brown Prophecy I ormula was applied. the it:liability for the total test was found to be 91 Ano' 91 was statistically significant beyond the 01 level anditiDiwninutator, valicht was established for the test since it differentiated between the three skill level groups be> ond the 001 level of confidence

42 OWNS TENN I513A DM INTONSQUASH GUIDE Working the Opponent Out of Position

PATRICIA ANN SHERMAN

I c0ll7petamio tennis matches, teacher. and coach since /'strums Ann Sherman 's experience includes teat lung cal Petreatum programs. Inmate tennis tamps. high school ploglams, and at the college level. She has ranked second in homen's singles and women's doubles inthe Nmthwestern Sectcon 01 the USLTA 101the 1968 playing season She lcc tiled her B S do glee from Winona State Colhge, Winona llimwsota. and her 11 A degree from the University o/ Iowa, lohu ('itsShe iscurrently an instructorinthe/' /n stair ducation Department and tennis (Oath in the (1171'0110" 10Itt1

In the game of tennis, edit' player is attempting to maneuver her opponent Out oi position Mule setting herself up for a winning placementtotheopenarea of her opponent's courtWhile maneuvering the opponent. the player should strive to force the opponent to cover as much of the court as possible She should also strive to reduce the opponent's possible angles of return while increasing her own at the same time. this can be done by attempting to establish a rhythmic pattern and then through variation of spin. speed. and placement, the player should be able to hit a winning placement or cause her opponent to en. There are five basic patterns which should be very effective at the intermediate and advanced levels of play These patterns can be used as practice drills Ito develop conditioning. accurate stroke place- ment, concentration, and meaningful game -like situations), or as basic strategy to work from in competitive play The choice of the winning placement which is to be used by a player in any of the patterns to follow depends upon many variables. The player must take into account the strengths and weaknesses of her opponent and her own ability to hit each of the variations effectively She must maintain variety to prevent consistent anticipation by the opponent and she must consider her position when initiating the stroke Diagrams will be used to show two of the basic patterns and to designate the winning placements which can be hit from these patterns. The key for the diagrams is found in Figure I. WORKING THE OPPONENT OUT OF POSITION 43 Play Stroke Return Number 1.1) (0)

"Farget I a Target 2

Target 3 L Target 4 d Attacking pla, er "I)" Defensive player Bounce of the ball Movement pattern of the player The numberindicates the movement 3 for each play

Figure 1. Key to diagrams

Five Basic Patterns

Continuous Deep Crosscourt Pattern

Descriptu)r, of Pattern.This pattern is established by bothplayers ( A and -1)") hitting continuous deepcrosscourts as indicated in Figure 2. player makes the stroke and thengoes bat Is to the center of the court behind the baselinein good ready position for the opponent's return Thispattern should be continued until the opponent begins to anticipate thenext shot and begins to move in that direction. At this point the playershould attempt a vanation in the pattern which may resultin a winning placement or cause the opponent to err. Wzrinitig MaementV.nations which can be employed from the continuous deep crosscouit pattern include thefollowing. I A deep drive down-the-line (Mat. Thiswill be effective it "D" anticipates another crosscourt to thesame corner and begins to move in that direction or if "D" does notreturn to the centei of the court quickly enough to be ableto Cover a shot to the opposite corner. 2 A drop shot to either Corner (Wa "this will cause "1) to cover a large area of the court, possibly to change direction,and it %%ill force "ir to make a good approach shotlhis is effective if "I)" is tired, lags in the backcourt, or doesn't havea forcing approach shot and net game 44 DGWS TENNISBADMINTON-SQUASHGUIDE 3 A short sharp crosscourt (Waert In this placement "D" isforced tar out ot position and must hit a good forcing return orshe hill be Laught III poor position for the next shot I he pattern and placements as shown in Figure 2 shouldbe resersed for the Lontmuous deep backhand crosscourt pattern Sequenceof Shots

Deep Forehand Crosscourt Deep Crosscourt Return DeepForehand Crosscourt Short Crosscourt Return ---

b

Targets ,2/ Drive Down-the-Line ZT, b Drop Shot tzt< Short Sharp Crosscourt

Figure 2 Continuous deep forehand crosscourts

Pattern Deep to One Particular Corner Nit/piton of /'alit inI his pattern is established in, one ph*. el hittiog deep to .t partiLular Lorne'legardless ot the position ot the return twin the opponentI his patternis kont wileduntil the opponent begins to anticipate the oe-'t stroke and then variations should be employed li'murrn; P/a(eutent LFrom this established patient toapartkular

coiner .1 5%inning placement can be hit to one of the lollo\Lmg meas. .1 1 \ deep dilLe of short sharp LiossLourt dose to the opposite Lorne!I his is etteLti\ e anticipates a stroke to the saute ouner or if she lags on her return to the centerof the Lourt alter he' !Holm's stroke I his sill IorLe -1)- to ,oLet a 2 \ chop shot to the opposite Loi net huge atea ot the Lout,to Lhange dueLtion, and toMake agood approach shot

Crosscourt - DowntheLine Pattern I he Di$(111)0(712'of Ailkin Ihis pattern is illustrated in Figure ; killis hit to alternate Lorners with oneplayer tplaNerD") hitting WORKING THE OPPONENT OUT OF POSITION 45 down-the-line while the other (player "A") hits crosscourt. Each player is to hit her designated stroke and then return to the center of the court just behind the baseline in go ready position for the opponent's return. In this pattern each player must run the complete distance across the court for each return. Notice that player "I)" must cover the greater court area since "A's- crosscourts draw "I)" outside of the sidelines. Continue this pattern until the opponent begins to anticipate the next stroke and then employ. variations WinningPlacements. WhentheCrosscourtDown-the-Line Pattern has been established, a winning placement can be hit in one of the following ways. (Assume the return from "D" is down-the- line to "A's'' forehand corner 0-- D -) 1. A deep forehand c:osscourt ( Tin a). "I his will be effective if "D" has been pulled far to her left op the previous stroke ant' unable to get to the forehand crosscourt. 2 A deep drive down-the-line (2221 b) "D" will be returning to the center of the court and anticipating a crosscourt. The change in direction makes this an effective placement. 3. A shortdrive down-the-line (IZZA c)"I)" again must change direction quickly, cover a greater court area, and also must hit a good forcing return or she will be caught in poor position for the next stroke 4. A short, sharp forehand crosscourt (IZ2f d). "D" wall haxc to travel a long distance to get to the shot and if the return is not a deep forcing shot she will again be caught in poor position

Sequence of Shots Deep Forehand Crosscourt 0 Deep Down-thet.ine Return 0-- Deep Backhand Crosscourt Deep DowntheLine Return

Targets :73 a Deep Crosscourt C72 b Deep Dnve-Down-theline c Short Drive Downthe-Line d Short Sharp Crosscourt

Figure 3 The crosscourt down-the-line pattern

46 DGWS TENNISBADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE Combination of Deep Drives Crosscourt Drop and a Sharp Placement to the Opposite Corner Desuzinton Of Pattern. Another winning combination which can be used effectively within a point includes deep drives, followed by a crosscourt drop shot ind then a sharp winning placement hit to the opposite corner. This forces the opponent to corer a large portion of the court, to hit a good approach shot Ind to gain good net position for the Muni. It the opponent begins to anticipate this drive, hit a drive to the opposite side.

Deep Drives Drop and Lob Combination Desorption of Pattern. In this pattern the offensive player can hit deep drives to the coiner, folkmed by a drop shot to the opposite side of the court, imd then lob to the alternate collier. This will tire the opponent quickly for she must not only cover the entire width ofthe court, but also the entire length The lob will give the offensive player a third possible placement following the drop shot

Breaking a Pattern If a player is being dr.mil out of position while employing a particular pattern, she can break the pattern by hitting the ball deep to the center ofher opponent's courtThis will cut down the opponent's possible anii,le of return alio the play er time to iecover her position once again Through thepractice of thesefivebasic patted and then variations of winning plaLements, the players shank velop good conditioning, fine positioning On the roust. fine point accuracy, and a repertoire of basic patterns to employ III COMpelltIVC pia)

WORKING THE OPPONENT OUT OF POSITION 47 Beneficial Indoor Drill for Advanced Players

E. DAWN McDONALD

/)unit IleDonald is a graduate of Sargent C'ollege, Boston. Itasa( , and Ye( d her ma terdegree from her n Ilhnms Ulmer situ. (An (winkle. She is an t/stislant projessolin charge tennis and badminton at lenta Slate Ulli1(11111, I met and is the Iowa DGIV,S tennis (hannum the following drill or game has been found to encourage good form and pravtive for the inteimediate or advanced tennis player, When this group is forced inside it bewines necessary to have a huge area for many to continue hitting safely with regular (emus balls and regular tennis ',rack"I Ins dirll avcommodates 24 students in one gN mnasium 1 he equipment lequned consists otpaddles, 01 paddle rackets, tleeeeballs, badminton COWIN and nets, simulants and ropeI he nets are put across the courts with the top of the net being 30 inches above the floor rope is ',tiling %tem, the (Omit above the net at a height ot 3() mehes above the floor "I he ()hie( tis to volley the tkeLeball over the net and under the lope. "I he lleeeeball niav be hit as101k)01altei one bounve the players swilllied that Illewill have to use lull groundstiokes am orderto have the Ile( vebail travel the length ofthe courtthe iestraming rope will make it nevessai lot the players to bend then knees as they stroke11 the pia; cis iesoit to(hopped ravket head, they will hit the fleeveball over the lope 1 his may he adapted tot various needs Same students will deuve sulti(ient challenge in trmt, to %one) Lonwk.utp.ely ovei the netmulct the tope and within the houndal Imes of a badminton courtthese students may raise then goal ot number of consecutive hitsFor the students who need the challenge of wort Nemo: ina he added and then the play tag ot points A servile omit may be marked on the !loin quite easily with the applivator type while shoe polish the service omit should he adiacent toe net, as in traditional tennis he he depth 01 this (milt will vary with the ability of the playersI he servive must pass under the rest huffing rope,I he VASSS scoring adapts very well to class play I his dull may be easily modified tor existing Londmons ',meson the floor ate not a nevessary part of the skills involved, SkIdeffis 48 DGWS TENNISBADMINTON-SQUASH GUIDE should notbe expectedto behighl3,successful inthenlust participationwiththeseskillsThe restriLting /one forces the student to work hard at Lull groundstrokes The studentcannot be successful stilth lazy knees or footkoik The challenge willcome with pi:R.11(e.

BENEFICIAL INDOOR DRILL FOR ADVANCED PLAYERS 49 Nielsen Stadium: A Top 10Rating

NANCY RICHWINE

cVaiu vRichwineisa(cc fluorin Noma( edn(atzon and (Thurman of the Wonzen's Eleatire Tennis hoglam at the t'inversity of;Os(onsin. Madison. She lecen'ed het 13 S depee from West (hotel State College, WestChestel, Penns' hama and her hi S. degree pom the Utner1111'Oi WIleonwn

"In Grateful Appreciation of thePrivilege of Good Education." I his quotation is engravedon a plaque which hangs in the lobby of the Nielsen Tennis Stadium,one of the largest buildings on the University of Wisconsin, Madisoncampus. Arthur C Nielsen, Sr and his wife Gertrude SNielsen, Un.versdy of Wisconsinalumniue responsible for the quotation as wellas the excellent indoor tennis and squash facility. Arthur Nielsen ofthe Nielsen Television Ratings was captain of the varsity tennis team when hewas a student at Wisconsin.Illsinterestintennis and concern over the lack of adequate tennis facilities prompted himto donate appioximately $2.250,000 to the University tocreate one of the largest indoor tennis buildings in the world. The building, containing12indoor tennis counts,5singles squash courts, and 1 doubles squash court was completedin the spring of 1968 The tennis courtsare an-cooled and the squash courts are an-conditioned. A large air-conditionedlounge fronied by glass permits an excellentview of two exhibition tennis courts. A completely fitted pro shop, large dressingrooms, and spectator galleries (accommodating 1,500 people)add to the versatility of the building.Rebound nets, overhead suspendedballs,strains, a video-playback camera, and Once Ball Boymachines are available to the tennis instructor for classuse. The tennis courts havea 42-foot high, white acoustic ceiling with diffused lighting for optimal playingconditions The iesdient court surfaceiscomposed ofa robberwed asphaltic emulsion called Saf Pla. The green color coatis a plexi-pave finish. Each count is separated from the others by curtains andheavy netting, adding sonic privacy and the opportunity for uninterruptedplay In addition to the extensive recreationaluse of the building, other programs include elective coed credit classes whichare taught during the less desirable recreation hours. Themen's and women's varsity teams use several courts for practice Group lessonsare offered to 50 DGWS TENNISBADMINTON-SQUASHGUIDE adults throughout the year and to children and high school students during the summer In the course of a week's operation, the stadium can acLommodate approximately 5,300 different tennis and squash players. Dining recreation hours individuals mat (all several daysprior to the time the) \\1st) to play to make a court reservation. Studentsare charged 50 cents for singles and 25 cents for doubles play. The staff ischarged 50 cents for doubles and one dollar lot singles play Mach court session runs for one hour and 20 minutes, The fee, compared to most other indoor facilities, where charges generallyrun from 5 to 10 dollars an hour. is quite minimal. There is no doubt that the stadium and its energetic staff have helped to create a growing interest in tennis oncampus and in the community. The enthusiasm shown by housewives, businessmen, high school students and our own students and faculty keeps the stadium occupied from 8.00 a.inuntil I1 00 p tit. evert day of the week. This response has set in motion plans for six additionaltennis Louts to be located outdoors adjacent to the present facility. Fath omit \till he 60 by 120 feet and of a tomparable sulfate to the indoor courts. the extensive use made of the Nielsen buildingis a tribute to a imam M.110 has emoted tennis and squash his entire lifeIlls gift ha- enabled whets to team and pursue these aLtitities Heretennis can he a ear-round as well as a lifetime sport. "In Grateful Appiccia- lion to the Nielsen, for the Privilege of Participating in 'tennis in one of the Finest 13mIdings of its Kind in the Woild

NIELSEN STADIUM: A TOP 10 RATING 51 Selected Tennis Bibliography

Revised by' SHARON CROW Skidmore College Saratoga Springs, N.Y.

BooksGeneral BA RNABY, JOHN M. Racket WorkThe Rev io Tenni% Benton Aiiyn & Bacon .1969 GRIMSLI Y,WII LTennis ItsLimon.People.andI. l'eni nglewoodMrs, N J.' Prentice Hall, 1971 KING, 13111.11:11 AN Tennis to Win I-1,anstonIii Harper & Row. 1970 LA NI. Y, AL ( mei rng the Conti New York Simon & Shuster 1968 LAVI R, ROD The Idu«ition of a Tennis /'later New York Simon & Schuster, 1971 LIIG111 ON, JIM Inside Tennis Tt.hniques nl It'inumg1 nglewood Cliffs, N.J. Prentice Ilan. 1969. MI. I "I ZI.R, PAUL .1r/rained Tennis. New York Sterling Publishing Co , 1908. I'A1ItL R 1, WILLIAM I WeekendI ennisCarden N Doubleday & Co , 1970 - _ The Cann of DoublesPhiladelphia and New YorkJ B Lippin,ott Co , 1908 "I A L13I R7, WILl1AM and OLDS, BRl'(I S 4tio4.( PH,doslion tothe Game of THints PhiladelphiaJ B Lippim.ott Co ,19-71 TILDE N. WILLIAM I Match Nat and .Spin of the Half eon Washington, N,YKninChat Press, 1968 (1N111 I) SIATFS I AWN II NNIS ASSOC IA HON (mural l'«nbook andTennisGuideNew YorkUS! IA Cua rent edition.

Books for Teachers AMI. RR AN ASSOCIM ION I OR 111A1:1 PHYSICAI CA- TioN, AND RI(jai\I ION Ideas lc>r 7(nnts Institution Rev Washington, D.. AA lip! R, 1967 DAVIS, DORM 11Y, ed Selected Tenni% and Badmintori Washington, I) C.' AAIIPIR, 1963 DRIVFR, 111' LI.N I. Tennis forea( he' sN1m..ison,WisII 1Driver Co ,1964. 1AULKNFR, 11), Tennis//ow to Play 71,//ol%to Tea< h ttNew Yolk Dial Press, 1970 DGWS TENNISBADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE FOGLI MAN HARRY Tennis t ( oach,leeches, and Plaen1).e. u' N C id\on Printing Ca1963 HARM AN, BOB Use !lead in lennn N Kenmkat Press, 1966 hI NI III D, JOI IN I JRI eachmt: and ,aching Tent is24 ed Dubuque. Iowa Win (' Brow is ('a19" PI .1(,I NIIOFF, STANZA 1(I rob' inn lac,'of TennisI nglewood ( lift,, N JPrentit 1970, RAMO, SIMONI; utaordma,Tc mils tot the 01 &titian Playet New York( town Publisheis, 1970 1 A LBER 1, WILLIAM Fand 01 DS, BRUCI S 7.1, Game of SinglesPhil4delploa and New YorkJ,13Lippincott Co ,1962. 11(1_1 R. JO ANN, ed., Selected Tennis and Badminton :Irttele, Washington. I) CAAIIPI R, 1970 UN:11 I)Si TLS LAWN 1 ENNIS ASSOCIr1ION-AMI- RICAN ASSOCI\ rIoN hOR III AL FIE PIIYSI( Al l'OUCA HON, AND RI CR I Al ION JOI N1 COMMI111-11 Tennis (;idup In so ric tam A ashingt on, I) ('A Alin R, 1963

Books for Students GE NSI RR0131 R'I'TennisPhiladelphia W B Saundels C 1969 III.NDRI N.,JOHNFundamentals !ennis C01111111,11,, Mu Merrill Publishing Co 1965, N101 FRAM, TONY!'!al' Bette? Tennis, Londo,tStanley Paul & (o, 1971. MURPHY, CHET Advanced TennisDubuque, IowaNV C Brown Co , 1970, PALERLY, SARAH. Taunts fin1 niiaref Ness YorkSimon & Schuster, 1966. Pl LION, BERRY (',TennisResedPaoht Palisad s,('alit Goodyear Publishing ('o, 1969 1 IL DI-N, WILLIAM 1. Host to PlaiBetter TennisReprint New York Simon & Schuster, 196f:

ArticlesResearchSkill Tests DIGENNARO, JOSI- P11.'Construction of Forehand Drive, Bat I.- hand Drive, and Service 1 emus TestsResearch Ow tells 40 (Oct. 1969; 490.501, 1)01311', DOROTIIY. "EftectiNeness at a (' inditioning Program on Selected Tennis Skills of WomenRe.seanh Qua? tet iv 40 (Math 1969), 39-44. IIIWITI, JACK h."ClassificationI esisin'I ennis Research erly 39 ( Oct1908), 552-555 SELECTED TENNIS BIBLIOGRAPHY 53 1.(1. \41) JO \ NN And \ I'\ I, NIRI LN N 1"Kemp-Vincent Rall! Ie.tofI enni Si. /?( search Quo !oil39 Wet, 19681, 1000-1004

Articles General AVI,R, ROD "I lie1 we 1 oughe.t Shot' Tenni\ / uluue 73 (June 1970), 146,147 %('l I MI N 1 S,LARR "Beitin I cruu ( ompetition I .10111TR 40 (MsA 1969) 41-4-2 SCO II,I tiGI L "Iiorehtam And Backhand / Sal? C 73 (June 1970), 141 WI L HAMS, DARR!L And 11111031 RCP, L \RR1" "Ienne., learn I eaL lung AMP/ R 41 ( \IA) I')70).30 -3.3

Magazines ,Spurts Illustiated 541 N I anbanks ( omit, (Imago. Ill 60611 /emits 1 emu. P.O Bo \ 5Itavina Station Highland Park III. 60035 T (mu+ CS IBo \ 224S. S Ilael rma.l , N J 07006 Lidgazim130\ 3, St.iniin Ness Volk, N

Free Materials

OM/ url Loa r1 h Plitt R riles V41.1%,%, PrOduLt., Int_ R 1 02084

/( rum Artt SL I A, 51 1, 42131 StNess 1 ctrl,, N 110017 holm Rules Dal. ton R.Lquet Co11,,inum Ohio 45304

54 OGWS TENNIS-BA DMINTONSQUASH GUIDE Selected Tennis Visual Aids

Revised by 'KAREN EMERY Dayton, Ohio

l'tices listed ale subteen to changeNumber, in parentheses icier to distubutois listed Ippi)thb, %mu% 14 mmI() nu b&w, color. Rental S% 50, (17)I echniques of singles pla Sale color S190, hXss SSO I enms demonstrated 1)sleading amateurs Scenes ofNational Championship included Slow motion,animation ideal as 1),N instruction and a review,to, e \periemed pla cmSpanish and 1 reach prints ivailable 15 min10 mm, colorSale S100 (nic lades lla%n /cum, Snok( Instruction Media Practicelips booklet) Rental is handledb! Center, Michigan State (1Meisit .I ast fans:rig, Nlich 48823 13) 1 otehand, backhand. lob. and ,mash are demon- strated in seine -slow motion Accompan2, ingnaitatne and title, point out base pants lust actual practice sessions Sale 14 mm ,InI mm. color or bliss B(gennIng 7 inni%1964 plus postage color 5145, 1),Km.S75, Rental 510 for three days, ( 1) Shows how the teacher instructsbegmmng and mkaneed players in individual and group situationsAnalysis of torehand and backhand di Ives andNOIIC!.,.sere, and smash oti« lac chnique. Bac kitana and /oichan(l l), n IS min, colorPut chase S150 Rental$25 (14) flow to iecognue and LOU' nt errors Coiie( /« /imam su,ithe Se/ u' 12 min, color Sale 5150 Rental 525 (141. flow to recogmieand correct errors //e'n' 1 emits Instrm non15 nun ,colorRental S25, Sale S150 (18), Dennis Van der Mee,1 iliaIntroduction to tennis skills. Good for teat heis ofbeginners in groups, and recom- mended for physical education teachers. IS loops het set (;u /s' TennisI 6 nun loop, slow motion Sale $25 ( (4)Doris Ilart, , JuneStack, Nam!. O'Connell, and Phyllis Saganski show strokes,footwork, pips senses and many other techniques (;,cut 1/onn its in 0/ nisi, 1905. 40 num, 10min,,ci b&w. May he clewed free of charge.Sale 5125. (7) 1 his e 1 dm traces the game of tennistwin its inception to kuiren1 (ortes. \Let pts of peal mak hesallow the L !owl to see thedifferent 55 SELECTED TENNIS VISUAL AIDS styles ofdress and play. Narrated by Chris Schenkel and Roy merson, the film highlights over 80 international players, from Dick Sears and Dwight Davis to 1):-nois Ralston and . Thu To's of Tennis. 25 nun.. 16 null, b&w. (1 2) Series of 5 minute shorts on volley, forehand, serve, end lob-smash demonstrated and explained by Kramer, Buchhon, Trabert, McKay, and Ralston, respectively. Also includes drills and tips on practice. Narrated by Bob Richards, On Tennis with Billie Jean King15 min., color, b&w, 1969 Sale color 5185 each, 5495 series, b &w SI 20 each. $360 series. (16) !Mee filmsrumor-senior high school. college, and advanced. Slazenger Films.RentalS35.(13).Instructionseries made in Frig land. Introduction to. Ball sense (II nun.). Starting to play (15 nun.), Service (9 min.); Court positions and net play (8 min.) lenms. Super 8 mm loops, cart ridged Chet Murphy. Sale $137 series. (15) Series of six )pops covering grip and forehand drive, grip and backhand drive, footwork. seivice, volleys and half volleys, lobs and smashes. Tennis. 4 nun. each. Super 8 mm loops Sale $21 each, S84 series (14). Consultant Bill Loner. Series covers forehand, backhand. service, smash. cool t position, and volley. Tennis. Six filmstrips, revised. 42 nun., 35 mm, si or sd., color Sale siS54, sd. S62.50. (2, 4, 10). Rental s3.50 plus postage, (5). lhe game, getting ready to play, the forehand drive, the backhand drive, the service, and rules simplified. Tennis, 8 mm and Super 8 mm loops. Sale $9 (8 mm), $11 (super m01). 550.95 (8 min set of 6), S62.95 (Super 8 min set of 6) (2, 10).Individual loopsonthe service, forehand drive, backhand drive, overhead smash, lob, and the volley. lennis A Game of a Lijetinub. 1966. 191/2 min., 16 mm, .a.1 b&w Sale S71. (11). Filmed in Australia under technical director Bari Ilopman, captain of the Australian Davis Cup 1 cam. Featuring lugh-lanking amateuis Roy Emerson and Fred Stolle as well .is Ameru.in star, Arthur Ashe. Slow motion is employed in the demonstration sequences to help ensure understanding. lennis Anyone12 nun ,color. Purchase $150 Rental 525(14). Highlights of a young tennis player's visit to tennis camp. Terimc Donble,s Strategy1966II nun ,16 mill, color, b&w, Sale 5130 color, $70 b &w, (1). Reviews basic strokes of tennis .1m1 demonstrates offensive and defensive strategyin the doubles game. Features ranked players during tournament competition In slow motion and regular speed with stop frameaction.

Tennis Fien/Ma/,1 Pm/nth/me/MilsI)65 1 1 111111,I6111111,sd , color or b&w Sale color 5130, b&w S70. Rental 510 for three MI) s, !du, postage. (I)ireliand and backhand drives. flat and slice

56 DGWS TENNISBADMINTON-SQUASH GUIDE serves. receiving serve. and volley are demonstrated by nationally ranked play ers Tory Freti. , and Karen Susinan. Verbal analysis and stop-action make this an excellent instruc- tional film for players of all abilities I emus for Beginners 16 min.. 16 mm, sd b&w Sale 552,50. Rental S20. (6). Alex Olmedo d-nnonstrates the basic tennis strokes, grips, footwork, body control, and b ice Also includes tips on practice and game improvement. "'emus Group Instruction. Filmstrip Sale S8 00 (8) Over 50 frames illustrate class organization for group instruction. Emphasis is on effect we utilization of limited space through use of formations and teaching stations With record and booklet. Tennis Intermediate and Adiamed ioulanientals. 1965. II min- 16 mm, sd , color or okw Sale color 5130, b&cc 570. Rental Si 0 for threedays,plus postage.(1).Excellent verbal analysis and demonstration of American twist serve, drop volley, lob volley. forehand and backhand smashes, half volley, lobs, and chop shotsNationally ranked players Tory Fretz, Dar;.tne Hard, and execute skills in game play and practice Slow motion and stop-frame action pro ride a good i-sportunity to view correct technique Tennis Singles Struiegi1966, 11 nun., 16 min. sdcolor. b&w. Sale 5130 color, S70 b&m,(I)Reviews basic strokes, and demon- stratesof fensive and defensive strategyinthe singles game Features ranked players during tournament competition. In slow motion and regular speed with stop frame action Tennis Tactics12 nun, colorDurchase SI 50 Rental 525(14). Basic tactics for singles and doubles for every level of play. runs Te(liniques12 min .16 min, sdcolor Sale $90. Rental $7 (one day), 512 (three days). $15 (five days). (9). I.mphasis is on voile} and forehand tnd backhand drives Techniques of demon- strating and explaining group teaching particularly good. Action shots of Pauline Bet/ demonstrate the importance of correct technique

Bulletin Board M 'vials Tuinis Group instructionAAIIPI R, 1201 16th St., N.W NN. ash- ington. C 20036 6Posters.$9, Aseries of24photo illustrations reproduced assix 24" x 30" durable plasticized posters. demonstrating class organization for group instruction 1 emus 1 cchnique ( hartsIX;VsS AAIIPI R, 1201loth St_ NAV Washington, I) C 2003612 chairs. $1,10 Illustrate courts and equipment, forehand and backhand grips, mechanics Of strokes. forehand and backhand drives, serve. volley, smash, lob, slice, ball flights, tournament diagrams

SELECTED TENNIS VISUAL AIDS 57 Film Distributors (1) All-AmericanProductions andPublishers,c/o (icor, B Pearson, Dept of Health, Physical Education, and Recreation, University of Alabama, University, Ala. 34586. (2) Athletic Institute 805 Merchandise Mart. Chicago, Ill. 60654 (3)Frank Beeman, Dept. of Intercollegiate Athletics. Michigan State University, East Lansing, Mich. 48823. (4) Don Canham's, 745 State Circle. Ann Arbor. Mich. 48104 (Wolveline Sports Supply) (5)Ideal Pictures, 1558 Main St ,Buffalo, N.Y. 14209. 417 N. State St.. Chicago, III60610, 1840 Alcatraz Ave Berkeley, Calif. 94703. (6) Owen Murphy Productions, Inc., 666 Fifth Ave New York, N.Y. 10019. (7)Philip Morris Incorporated, 100 Park Ave New York, N Y 10017 (Address requests to Roy Emerson) (8) AAIIPER Publications-Sales, 1201 16th St., N.W., Washington, 1) C. 20036. (9) The Coca-Cola Export Corporation, 515 Madison Ave., New York, N.Y. 10022. (10)'F NRogers Productions, Lookout Mountain Studio, 6641 Clearsprings Rd., Santa Susana, Calif. 93063 ( II )United States Lawn Tennis Association, 51 F 42nd St.. New York, N.Y. 10017. (Rental films available). (12) Whea t les Sports Federation. Title Insurance Bldg.. Minneapolis, Minn. 55401. (13) International Sports Productions, 19 W. 44th St., Rm. 1418, New York, N.Y 10036 (14) Dennis Van der Meer, Berkeley Tennis Club. Berkeley, Calif 94705 (15)Holt, Rinehart and Wr>n, 383 Madison Ave , New York, N.Y. 10017. (16) Independent Film Producers Company, P 0 Box s01. Pasa- dena, Calif. 91102. (17) Associa'AonInstructionalMaterials, Division of Associated Films, Inc.. 600 Madison Ave, New York, N Y. 10022. (18)Frith Films, Box 424, Carmel Valley, Calif. 93924.

58 ()GINS TENNISBADMINTON-SQUASH GUIDE USLTA Women's National Collegiate Tennis Championships

requirements for the Women's National Col;egiate Championships and all Sett )sal Championships shall be is tollows (exception Point 51

1 An \wma student who is presently enrolled as , undergraduate student in a unnersit .college, of tumor college. .ind is approved her Lollege as meeting its academic lequire- mews. shall be eligible An undergraduate student isdefined as one who has not retettied the 13 A. degree or its equivalent. 2 A student may participateina tournament held during the summer provided she was enrolled for the semestn or quarter preceding the tournament. (I xteption. Seniors giaduating any time doting the sthool yearpriorto the tournament may participate 31 ran%I erstudentsareimmediatelyeligibleforparticipation tollow,ing enrollment in the institution 4 A student may participate no more than lour tines Tntries nt 7 he 111(onen's Natumal Collegtate ( ihimptonAtip shall be limited to tour piatcrs irons each college, all of whom ina. compete in singlesA doubles team shall tonsist of two players I rom 'he same College, and each college is limited to into doubles teams Not(Singles players ina.also play doublesI' %Leption Set norm! championships in.0 determine their ott,i1 regulations in regard to the number of (little% in singles and doubles pla, 6All participants shall be of amateur standing as defined by the US! TA All partmpants in The Skomen's Nationalollegiatehampion- ship and iii.111 Set.(1011:11ttr.irnpronslups shall be enrolled with the I_ 1 A Allparticipantsshallbe tend iedbythe chairmanofthe Department of Phtsital I ducahon tot women of their tespettRe institutions ; responsibilit tor the health status of students sh.tN be assumed the respet live institutions

Awards at the Tot. nament Ilse"I reesh Howl is given to the singles.inner. and the Pat Yeomans "l rayispresentedto the doubles thamplon% A team trophy donated by Airs Catherine Sample i% awarded to the winning tollege for one yeal. Mementos may be given to the teammembers USLTA WOMEN'S NATIONAL COLLEGIATE TENNIS CHAMPIONSHIPS 59 by the host college US! `IA silver ballsare awarded to the singles and doubles winners and USI 1A silvei medalsto the limners-up I he Woman's I emus Leadership Awardthis award was donated to the USIA A by Mrs Judy Bata of Bron %%AUL,New York, to be awarded annually at the Naoon,d CollegiateChampionships to woman pliskal educator who has made outstanding contributions to the development and growth of tennis for girls andwomenI he selection for this award 55111 be made jointlyby the USIA A and the DGWS Persons wishing to suggest qualifiedwomen who should be considered forthis award should send thennominations to Mrs. Monroe Lewis, 6805 WashingtonBoulevard, StLouis. Missouri 63130 the first woman so honoredwas Mrs, 1 cull W Guthrie of Stanford University in 1460In 1070 Joan Jr,:inson of California Slate ( ollege. t os Angeles, was recipient of thiaward 1 he 1972-73 tournament will be heldat Aulvirn College. Auburn. Alabama.

GO DGWS TENNISBADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE TENNIS STUDY QUESTIONS 1972-1974

i'ART I

Directions Indicate the umpire's det ision in the tollowing situations There is only one best ansvver .1triers to the server and B refers to the receiverPlease assume that no tonditions exist other than those stated.

SP . Server's point RI'.. Receiver's porn( I...... Fault I . Let BC I' ..... 13a11 continues in play

1 ('layer A's torehand drive touches the net post and hits the ground within the receiver's court 1 1 one volleying at the net, player A accidentally touches the top of the netIler return is good. Player B is unable to return the ball 3 A play er serves front the wrong court. She loses the point and then remember, that she served from the strong courtShe requests that a let be declared. -1. I he service. or a ball in play, strikes a ball ly mg in the court. 5.Player A crosses an imaginary line in extension of the net before making a good return. Play er 13 tails to return the ball 1% I he part net of the server svho is at the net volleys a return to %vitt the point After contacting the ball on his own side of the net. the racket head passes over the net In doubles. ('layer A serves to Player B svho returns the serve. Nay (', who is Player A', partner. throws her racket which hits the ball and causes it to go over the net and into the opponent's court Neither Player B nor Myer I) returns 1..11 S1 he ',lore is 30-30 A player serves the second ball. 'I he umpire

calls "fault" and then corrects himself and calls "play." 1 he ieceivet hesitates. attempts but fails to return the serve 9 play er prefers to serve from a position which Is very close to the baselineDuring the service motion and before the ball is hit one foot is swung inside the baseline but does not touch the tour( 10Playet A serves underhandI he service lands in the correct service court, 11 Player A executes ashot which has so much spin thatIt rebounds back over the net Player B dashes toward the net and TENNIS STUDY QUESTIONS 61 manages, without touching the net, to tap the ball just before It touches the court on the opponent's side of the court 12 The second ball served bt Player A hits the reeener's partner before touching the mound or a permanent tmure. 13 A spectator %calks across the back of the court as the receiver attempts to mum a forehand drive. The ball lands in the net as the player was lowed to restrict the backsccing to avoid hitting the spectator 14In a singles match played on a court used for singles or doubles, Player A serves from behind the baseline bet seen the singles sideline and the doubles sideline 15A plate'', first service is long and is hit %cull such foice that it rebounds tram the backboard behind the coutt and distracts the leceivel tit mg to return to second sense. 1 he receiver requests a let

PART 11

Directions Read the questions caretulltSelect the one item %cinch best answers the question, 16.I he server's partner stands in a position that obstructs the vie of the receiver. 'Hie receiver tails to multi the Nere What is the decision,' .I. I et, and server's paitner is asked to move so as not to obstruct teceivet b Fault c Point fen receive' d Point for saver 17 During the first sets ice 01 a game, Plat er A has a single Ludt. on the second service, Playa A goes through the complete sercmg motion and misses the ball What Is the umpne's decision? a Love-I5 b 15-Love c I et, one more ball d Let, two more balls 18 A 1111CSIllall's view is obstructed by a player so that he cannot make a deLls1011 on a ball that falls close to the line. What's the procedure') a, I he umpire makes the decision, b he umpire may ask another linesman c. umpire orders the point replayed d May be ant one of the above 62 DGWS TENNIS-BADMINTON-SQUASH GUIDE of the mime 19 Which of the following is the privilege and duty a ( an o\ crude the decision 01 a linesman b. Can iemo\ e a linesman. Should repeat the call of the linesman c tune. d Ilas the authority to postpone the match at any 20. What choices may the winner of the tosshave') a. She automatically serves tint t o ser e. in winch case het opponent cnoosesside b serve or to c Side. in which case her opponent tilOses to leceive or to her d Side, or the right to serve ortet..1:1\ e, opponent 10 make lust .twice

21 When may a match be postponed) a A play er fails to report in time for hermatch h Weddle' conditions are bad c A play er is injured d. A play er becomes ill 22 W hen may the serving order behanged') of the net to the a When the teams change nom one side other sin is serving b At the start of any game in which the t e At the start of a new set d Necr dining the same match 23 I he ieeeivel is tying her shoe lace as the firstball is seived. At the last moment she sees that the hall isgood and attempts to return it, but tails What is thedecision, a Let h Fault c Point for senor d Point for 1 eta:Wel. changed by the 24"I he order of receiving the service is accidentally receivers. Which of the following statements isIrlie when itis a. Partner, resume their original order of receiving their turn to receive again. b The order iemains altered until the end of the game in which the mistake is discovered. Any points made count d All of the above 25 An umpue, without linesmen, notes atoot -fault violation of the server. What v. his duty' a To warn the server and call a let 1 0 make no attempt to call footfaults b. yet c to warn the Wiwi' and take no act ton as d 10 call a fault 63 TENNIS STUDY QUESTIONS 26 What is the procedure when an official postpones a match') a The match shall be replayed from the start. b The interrupted set shall be replayed from the start, c The previous score and the previous occupancy of the courts shall holdunlessthe players and referee agree otherwise d. None of the above because matches are ;levet postponed 17 he receiver's return passes outside the post below the level of the net and bounces in the correct court. What is the decision" a Ball remains in play b, Server's point c Receiver's point d Let 28 Which of the following are require' specifications of a tennis racket'' a 27irkhes in length b Balanced evenly at half-way point c. 9 inches across racket face d None of the above Player B, who is returning Player A's serve, hits a backhand drive which goes over the baselinePlayer A volleys the ball twin behind the baseline and calls outI he ball does not go over the net What is the correct decision' a Point for Player A as ball was out h Let, replay point c Point for Player A since she called out d. Point for Player B 30, In which case is the service a let" a The ball strikes the top of the net and then hits the receiver belore it touches the ground b ball goes through a hole in the net c fhe ball strikes the top of the net and then bouikes in the backcourt d None of the above

64 DGWS TENNISBADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE ANSWERS AND RULE REFERENCES

PART I PART II

Answers Rule References .1nswers Rule Referen«'s 13CP 22-a 16 D 34 2 RI' 18-e 17 A 9

3 RI' 10, t. a.e1 18 I) USI FA I ourn 4 I3CP 11e Reg. 15 5 SP 4, Law 1 19 C I eel) Ott 6. SP 22-ti Ti. 911. Callmg 7 RP 18+ I he Maul) 8 I, -23, taw5 p 61. -:-.-7 9 1301' 70 D 5 0 13C1' 6, laNt. 4 21 B 79, 30 1 13( I' 21, 22 ( 33 2 SP 16,1 23 ( II 3 1 23, t.,6,e 1 24. I) 34, 36 4 I 6, Lam: 1 25 D USI FA 1ourn 5 1 23. t..1.,6 Reg 14 26 C 29 27 A 11. 28 D 29 I) 18-t. 30 A 13

ANSWERS AND RULE REFERENCES 65 TECHNIQUES OF OFFICIATING TENNIS

TENNIS SUBCOMMITTEE Principles and Techniques of Officiating Committee

DUTIES OF THE REFEREE Inthe case of each tournament, the toutnament committee elects the referee

The referee shall

I Know and apply all the rules. being able to decide quickly and to take full responsibility for his actions 2, Have the pil,cer to appoint a substitute and may not umpire a match unless a substitute referee has been ftppointed 3. Have the power to appoint and remove umpires, net umpue,, and hnesmen, and to assign courts and to start matchek, , Decide {tnypoint of law which an umpire may be unable to decide, or which may be refereed to the referee on appeal nom the decision of an umpire. Such a uecisionisfinal unless reversed by the USLTA I XeCtt e ()num: +.00 5Have the sole power to excuse a competitor from playing for definite period. bDefault a competitor who has not been excused and refuses to play when called upon to do so 7.At his discretion, at any tune, postpone the match he -ause of darkness or conditions of the ground or weather 8. Give approval to postponement of a match by the umpire of order immediate continuation of the match 9.Decide it an unfinished match is to be entirely Tepid), ed, it the contestants are so agreed. 10Be present or arrange for a substitute dunng all play I I.Sit beside the court, alongside the unnure', chair, during plat of the finals and other important matches. 12. (liveapproval to the umpire's decision thatno%balls are necessary.

Combinationand digest of " US I 1 A 1 °imminentRegulations"and "Instructions for tournamentu Officials" reprinted bypermission fromthe Umpires' Manual,published by U.S. LawnI emits Association. S II.42nd St New York, N Y 10017. 66 DGW., TENNISBADMINTON-SQUASH GUIDE

4 DUTIES OF THE UMPIRE The umpire shall

I have an exact kno\cledge of the Play mg Roles. tournament Regulations, ind then proper enfolcemenr and ne .pon,11,1v, for the proper conduct of the match. 2 Be on hand and read% \\hen the match is called 3(oncentrate on the match and tollmc it keenly 4. Be sur.' the court is correc t, measuie the net at thecenter and at the posts and adjust the net during play, tf necessary 5.( heck that thereisa full complement of chaos for linesmen

placed opposite the various lines and not 1 'cing the sun (see chagiamt (Towne's chair should he centered on the net about 5 feet from itm.ith the seat not less that 5 feet from ground (preferably 7 tt..L.11 6 ,\ [tang, for toy, tor choice of court andserstcc Sore vie match and recoid points on a scoiecaid 5.( all the scow plomptly and distinctly 9 Direct the players to change courts in accordance v oh Rule 25 10Viatch 'or and call any miraction of tides and stay withyour decision t1 y oft feel It is cistiect

8. SERL SERL 8L

j SL

CSL--

SL NU U Diogram of Gtf.ctols

Bt. Bose linesman CSICenter Service linesman SERIService linesman U-- Umpire seated on elevated stand SISide linesman NUNet Umpire seated by net post

Insure that players serve how the propel cowl 12I nsure that players receive limn the proper court 13.('all seivice faults, lets, outs, ind foc.t taults only it thewoici no linesmen or net umpoe

TECHNIQUES OF OFFICIATING TENNIS 67 14( all a let and replay the point to accordance with Rule 23 15 It appealed to by a player (luting a rally, Na,. nothing Delude all doubtiul or dINIMIC(1 strokes subjeLt to decision of the linesmen, arid all points of law, subjeLt '0 an appeal to the retcc Deode when new balls are required, subject to approval of referee ISUphold the decisions of linesmen and net umpire 10. Order a point replayed when a linesman or net umpire LorreLts his decision if the Lail has atteLted the play of either side 20DeLide, at times when a linesman or net umpire is unable to lender a decision himself, or call a let and replay the point. 21 AnnounLe the ten- nunute intermission, noting time and name of player next to serve, and notify players three minutes before trine is up See that play is promptly resumed with all (diktats in place 22Suspend play due to LIR umstam:es not within the Lontrol of the players. _3Postponethe match because of kness or conditrons of ground or weather, subject to approval of tilt r 'Mee. 24Remove a linesman or net umpire Ion just Liise. subject to final decision t he referee. 25Do not let the gallery disturb the playersItit does, stop play aria ask for cooperation 01 the spectators. 26Sign the scorecard and deliver it to the proper authorities at the end of the match

CALLING THE MATCH General Suggestions

1 Have a sLoteLard, two soft pencils with erasers, and a Lop) of t he L ut rent DGWS I enms-Badnunton Guide 2.Writ: the names of the Lompentors on the sLoreLard, and be sure of their coireLt pronumiation Be able to project your yoke so it can be heard easily by ganef!. . Allow the players not mote than three minutes for warm-up After the warm-up announce This match is between Miss Jones and Miss SanthMiss Jones servingLinesmen ready') Play 6.Call the name of each player as she serves for the first time. The umpire repeats all calls of linesmen and the net umpire S When the s:rvice falls into rich on first serve, do not call a fault ) Act as the connecting link between the match and gallery keep your eyes on the ball In play and concentrate attention on the col reLt calling of score and LonduLt of the match. OGWS TENNISBADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE 10After a point is finished, first mark the scorecard and thee:raise y our head and announce the score loudly and distinctlyMake announcements shall-) and clear with a brief pause after each syllable. I I,110Id the scorecard with the thumb of your left hand touching the hie of the game being played. 12('all the server's score first. 13. Call advantage by saying, "Advantage, Miss Smith," 14Call games as follows. "Game, Miss Smith, games arc four to two, Miss Jones leads, first set," 15. Callsetasfollows' "Game and secondset,Miss Smith, seven-five, sets aie one-all 16After the first set, announce the set score every three or four ga rates. 17.In making announcements, the words to be emphasued are the names and the score 18At the finish of a match announce "Game set ind match Miss Smith, score 3-6, 12-10, 6-3 Always give the winner's score first. 19, Correct the score whenever you have called it incorrectly Call "Correction. The score isI 5-all" 20. Wait until the applause subsides before calling the score 21 ('all "not up" if a player fails to reach ball on first bounce. ('all this 0iimediately to prevent confustion rather than waiting to see whether or not the ball is returned. 22. Call "four stroke" or "stroke" when a player loses the point by playing improperly, such as by touching the net with her body, racket, or anything she wears or carries while the ball is in play, or if she volleys the ball before it has passed the net 23Call all lets if there is not net umpireboth on services and on situations where the point is to be replayed, according to the JulesIn calling a service let, say. "Let, first service," or "Let, second service," 24.If there is not a full complement of linesmen, ca'I faults and outs on Imes you have agreed before the match to judge. Note The further side lines and two base lines are hardest for an umpire to judge, so when possible, linesmen should be assigned to these hues The service lines are the next most difficult to judge. If there are no linesmen, players may agree to iudge further side lines and base lines in their own court. 25If there are no base linesmen, call foot faults which may be judged from the chair. 26. Never announce "match point," or "set point." TECHNIQUES OF OFFICIATING TENNIS 69 ,HANG( SiCIS ASTIR ((LAVERS 11 _4 (7C MTints

POINTS-SET No.l A E C D

I AF /. 0.,.

Ail The Scorecard shows that "n the first game the score ran and would have been called thus"15 love, 30 love, 30-15, 40-15, 40-30, game 'A 81"In the second game "Love-15, 15-all, 15 30, 30-011, 40 30, deuce, advantage (C D ), deuce,"and so onThe score of the server should be called first

TECHNIQUE OF SCARING

I Record name. of pa LI, in the proper ,pate on the \korecard 2 Niter the order of 0.1ke N determined, initial the Tate.. alternateL, on ne ,tott )oard for the entire ,etIn t ,Ne 01 a long demi.. game In Muth there are TIM enough 4.,quare. m Wilk. h to rkord the wort'Itp. adNable to go into the next page on the ught ur on lilt' bath of the lard. but never do11 the Lard \there the next game goe,, Put phi!, el.' untiak ,tt the top of e twine right-hand tulumn 4 I he pornt,, are tekorded lty Mean". Of perk. 11 marl,. in the ...paLe.., beneath the \t old Pour. putting the erver\ punk on the lop line and th,' reterer\ On the ...ekond lute, a. illtNtrated abort'

DUTIES OF LINESMEN

A. line...anal)I. appointed bythe refereend may hr rtmoted only by the ,eferee

The linesman shall 1. Be on hand and ready \then the match I. tailed Not wear Mute or light Clothe 3 Be,eatedtat mgt helinehe m, cite,.and heale! tand kontentiate every uNtant the hall N in play 4 SN (1(11(11), claim!, play and nor leave without 1)e/rms./on of the umput 01 until another lint .man ha,. been put in hp. plat e In to get out (a the play et'. wayif he ...cc,. he \till interfere v,itti a ,a(Oke OGWS TENNISBADMINTON-SQUASH GUIDE 0 Watch the Inc hnot the ball Sense where the ball will bounce, and it neLessar change position to see it. Remember "A ball Calling on a line is regarded as falling in the court bounded b the line," (Rule 20.) SCallhis decision loudlyand sharply and with conviction Accompan) his call with a motion of his arm m the direction that the ball lands out of the courtif applause ma> drown out the tall,

( k ueLimons as quickly as is consistent with AC curat,y. 10Neser call "out until the ball has actuall struck the ground ot trkture outside the court 11 ( all only "out or "fault never "good 12. Change his decision when he realties he has made an errorlie Must 1111111edhitel)'ell the umpire w ho decides who he, or not the point shall be repla,,ed 13Callitto the attention of the umpire if he ,_.ills i score at variance with the linesman's decision 14Make his dekimon as he sees the ball and stkk to it'I he play cr.. umpireand reteree rever overrule the decision ota linesman on a question ot tad 15Put his hands user his ekes it the phi), ci obstruk is his kick% 01 the ball or line'Hie umpire make, the deosion, asks another linesman oi ordels the point repla)ed

The center service linesman shall Judge whethe: or not the erLer is standmg on the propel side ot the ,enter ser( ike markIt the senor Ctrs Tali a toot fault 2 ( all a ;atiltitthe sere lands on v. long side of renter set-% k e lmk

The service linesman shall sine hinds behind the seiLikeline 1 ( all a 1 %mit it The

The side linesman shall

I Judgewhether oi not the serve! is standing on the ,,,oper side 01 the side lineit the set Let errsall a toot fault, 2St Ind up when the seiL Ike is in the Lour( he is w.itklung. ( all a fatill 11 the seise lands outside the single side line

The base linesman as loot fault judge shall-

I hotoughly11dt:island the loot Lault Mk 2 Call a loot oil)when posit Rt. the rule has been broken TECHNIQUES OF OFFICIATING TENNIS 71 :!TIES OF THE NET UMPIRE The net umpire shall-

I SItnearthe net post and call(a) lets on service, and (h) halls that go through the net. the tall being "Ldt" or "through Place his lingers lightly on the net cold dining the service to detect service lets which may not be easilseen 3I: eep aduplicate score of the match. 4Call "not ups" when requested by the umpire. 5Note when halls are to he changed and see that the halls aie changed at the proper tune

72 DGWS TENNISBADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE RULES OF LAWN TENNIS AND CASES AND DECISIONS 0 The app( rid( 41 ((Id(' and Cast % and De (151(MS, /t'5Cd to 93-9,istheOfficial Code ofthe international Lauri 7emns 1-(thration. of it hi( h the United .States Lass,: Tennis 1550( /0/0/1 /5 a Mt 'libel Tlw lournament Regulations rs an addendum adopted by the United States 1 astir Tennis ,t scot ration and is official in tlw Lnued States onli, althoughitin no hat conflicts ulth the Code or 0 int,fr tonal practice xplanations, while not official U. terances. mar be considered a ( 0? c( I guide for lorterpretioic the Rules Thej halt been prepared br 11th /emus ///p/PCS SsOc iutirm to anyiliji, and explain the turmal ( ode THE SINGLES GAME

RULE 1 Dimensions a-1 Equipment Hie court shall be a rectangle 78 feet long and 27 feet v idsIt shall be divided across the middle by a net suspended from a cord or metal cable of a ma \linum diameter of 1/3 inch. the ends of which shall be attached to, or pass over, the tops of two posts, 3 feet 6 inches high, the center of which shall be 3 feet outside the court on each side. The height of the net shall be 3 feet at the center, where it shall be held down taut a strap not more than 2 Indies wide There shall be a band covering the cord or metal cable and the top of the net not less than 2 nor more than 21'2 inches in depth on each sideThe lines bounding the end and sides ofthecourt shall respedivel: be called the base Imes and the side lines On each side of the net, at a distance of 21 feet Irons it and parallel with it, shall be drawn the service Inter The space on each side of the net between the service line and the side Imes shall be divided into two equal parts, called the Service courts, by the center service line, which must be 2 inches in width, drawn halfway between, and parallel with, the sidelines.1ach baselineshallbe bisected by animaginary continuation of the center service line to a line 4 inches in -length and 2 inches m width, called the center mark, drawn inside the court, at right angles to and t1 contact with such base lines All other Imes shall be not less limn I inch nor more than 2 inches in width, except the baseline, which may be 4 inches in width, and all measurements shall be made to the outside of the lines

Reprinted by permission from the limp:, e's Manual. published by the 1.1.h. Lawn lenins Association, 51 1. 42nd St N.nk York, N.Y. 10017, RULES OF LAWN TENNIS AND CASES AND DECISIONS 73 ,FoilIn the case ot the International ship Lan tennishampton- Datis Cup) of other ottictalelhimpionslups of the Inlet national Fedefation, there shall bea space behind each bast line of not less than 21 teet, and at the sidesof not less than 12 feet tplauan,o1,,1 Rui, The posts In doubles should be 3 teet outside thedoubles coin t The net should be 33feet w wide toi a dolthh.', court. It .ort a simt,les court. and 42 feet should touch the ground alongIts clink: length an Inc flush to the posts ,ft allpoints Itis good to haw a 'slick 3 feel at the 3-toot marls. for the t, inches long, with a IlOkhIto in purpose ot meastning the heightor the net at the posts and at therenterI hese nieasurenients the measurements of the as well as court INA .ilwa}s should bemade hetoie starting to play an unpotl.intWald)

RULE 2 Permanent Fixtures I lie permanenttistures 01 th.: court shall litdUth nc1, posts not only the cord of metal cable,snap. and hand, but also, where there are an} such, the bids and side stops. the stands. tro.dof imitable setts and chairsaround the court and their othei li\tures Mound and occupants all abuse the emit, and theiinpir.r, toot tault Ridge, and linesmenwhen in then iespec !ice plate, orthepurposeotthisrule,the word "(mimic comprchends Inc (unpile and allthose persons designated to him in the conduct ofa mai. assist

RULE 3 Ball Size, We',ht, and Bound lhe ball shall hate a uniform owe: sulfate 11 there ale aa} seams, they shall be stitthless, thehall shall he mole than 2-1 2 inches and less than 2-5.1lushes in diameivi ounces and less Ain 2-1116 , and may than 2 ounces in weightI he ball shall hatea hound ofroc,: than Cl inches and less than SS 100 inche, upon a inches \Ohl; dropped concrete base and the defamation ofMote than 2t)'; of an inch and toss than290 of an inch when sublet. pressure 01IS lb led to applied to each end ofany diameter I 01 regulations toi testing halls,see USI I A / minn 't 1/amw/ Non At the Annual General Meeting01 the II 12. 1967, it was agreed that I b held onJuly lor the time being. nonpiessuwedballs and loss pressure hallsmas not he used in the Intsinational I lennis Championship Masts Cup), awn unless mitt nall agreed Itsthe two nations tahing pallin any pains Ida esent 74 DGWS TENNIS-BADMINTON-SQUASHGUIDE DIAGRAMS AND DIMENSIONS OF A TENNIS COL

Dovb les s,ngles

RULES OF LAWN TENNIS AND CASES AND DECISIONS 7S .Vote"Ilow often may a player have new balls9 According to Tournament Regulation 14g. the umpire, subject to the approval of thereferee. may decide when new balls are required to ensure fairness 01 playing conditions In matches Where there is no umpire. the players should agree beforehand on this matter

RULE 4 Server and Receiver The players shall stand on opposite sides of the net. the player who first delivers the bail shall be called the server. and the other the receiver. case /Does a playa. attempting a stroke, lose the point it he trusses an imaginary line in the extension ot the net. (a) before striking the ball. (b) after striking the ball' DeerszoaIle does not lose the point m either case b) crossing the tmaguiaryline, provided he does not enter the lines bounding his opponent's court (Rule 180 In regard to hindrance. his opponent ask for the decision ot the umpire under Rules 19 and 23 Caw 2 Ttw server claims that the receiver must stand within the lines hounding his court Is this necessao ) Dcersron No The receiver in.* stand w he rever he pleases on his side of the net

RULE 5 Choice of Sides and Service The choice of sides mid the right to be server or receiver in the lust game shall be decided b) toss The player vh,mning th, toss may choose or require his opponent to choose (a) The right to be server or receiver, in which case the ()diet player shall choose the side, or (t)) The side, in which case the ()ther player shall choose the light to be server or receiver

RULE 6 Delivery of Service The serviceshallbe deliveiedinthe1 ollovv mg mannerim- mediately before commencing to serve, the server shall stand vvith both feet atrest behind (i.efarther twin the net than) the base line, ind within imaginary continuation of the .enter mark and side line. The server shall then project the ball by hand into the an in al.). direction and before it hits the ground, strike it with his ',tart, the delivery shall be deemed to have been completed at the moment 01 the impact of the racket and the ball A player with the use ot only one arm may Millie his racket for the projection 76 DGWS TENNISBADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE ON I'slay the server in a singles game take his stand behind the portion ot the base line between the side lines of the singles court and the doubles court' Decision No. Case 2If a player. when serving, throws up two or more balls instead of one, does he lose that sers ice? Decision No A let should be called, but if the umpire regards the action as deliberate, he may take action under Rule 19 Case 3 If a ball in play becomes broken, should a let be called' Decision Yes Case 4 \lay a player terse underhand' Der own Yes There is no restriction regarding the kind ot sersise which may be used. that is. the player may use an underhand or an overhand %ersta at his discretion

RU LE 7 Foot Fault The server shall throughout the delivery of the serme (a) Not change his positnni by vva:king or running (1)) Not touch, with either toot. anarea other titan that behind the base line with the imaginary extension ot the center mark and side line Note: The following interpretation of Rule 7 was anproved by the Intern Tonal Federation on Jul!. 9. 1958 (al The server shall not, by slight movements of the feet which do not materially allect the location originally taken up by him, be deemed "to change hispositionbywalking or running The word ''toot'' means the LAtrenutv ot the leg below the ankle

RULE 8 From Alternate Courts (a) In delivering the service. the server shall stand alternately behind the right and kit courts. beginning from the right in every game. If service hom a wrong half ot the court occurs and is undetected, all play resulting trout such wrong service or services snail stand, but the inaccuracy01the station shall be cot reeled immediately upon discovery. (b) The ball served sha': pass over the net and NI the ground within the service court which is diagonally opposite. or upon any line bounding such court, bet ore the receiver returns it

vplarawn,91Ruh ,' In the absence ot a linesman and umpire, itis cusioniai) for the receiver to determine whether the service isgout ofne>t 77 RULES OF LAWN TENNIS AND CASES AND DECISIONS s RULE 9 Faults The service is a fault(a) itthe server contents any breach of Rules 6. 7. or S.b) if he misses the ball in attempting to strike it. (c) itthe ball served touches a permanent fixture (other than the net. straps. or band) before it hits the ground. are IAtter throwing the ball up preparatory to serving the server decades not to strike at it and Lilac.% it insteadIs it a Decision No. Case 2. In serving in a suedes game played on a doubles court vvith doubles and singles net posts, the ball hits a singles post and then hits the ',2,101111liSsithin the lines of the correct service court. Is this a fault or a let') Decision In serving itis a fault because the single, post. the doubles post, and that portion of the net, strap. or band between them are permanent listures (Rules 2 and 9, and note to Rule 22).

RULE 10 Service After a Fault After a fault (if itis the test fault), the server shall .erve again from behind the same half of the court !rote which he :aye(' that fault,unless theservicewas Ironsthe wrong half, when, in accordance with Rule 8. the server shall he entitled to one service only from behind the oilier halt. A fault may not be claimed atter the next service has been delivered. Case 1. A player ser.es from a urine court. Ile le se% the point and then claims it v,a, a fault becaus: of his wrong station. Dci Aunt The point -tands as play .d and the next wry lie should be from the corset t station according to die score Case 2 The point score being the server, by mistake. serves In mi the 101 Lou it11c wins the point Ile then serves again Iron the right -handtote t. delivering a faultthe nns'ake in SIAM is then discovered. Is he entitled to the previous 1)01;1111 rein which court should he nest serve' De( mum, The previous point stands The nest service should be t rom the lett court, the score being 30-IS ind the server has served one fault

RULE 11 Receiver Must Be Ready The server shall not serve until the receiver is readyII the latter attempts toreturntheservice, heshall be deemed ready.If, however, the receiver signifies that he is not ready, he may not claim a fault because the ball does not hit the ground within the limits fixed for the service Explanation of Ride I I The server must wail until the receiver is ready for the second service as well as the fast, and it the receiver claims to be not ready 78 DGWS TENNISBADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE and does not make an Mort to return a ser.u.e. :he sels.t mas not the point es. ii though the sets ke was good

RULE 12 A Let Inall LiNes wherea let kJ. to he called under the rules, or to moside foran inteiruptionto pits,itshall haw the following interpretation (a)11 hen sole!} m respect 01 a serske,that onesets onls shall be replaed (h)11 hen called under any othet t.ritinistames, point shall he ed ( .2O/1 sk i is ill ICH riCd b 'ninelust. outside those dituttd toRule I i shOUld Ilse sernl,r (MIS bC FC ph% Cd A tu +ItNo, the %%huh. point1111151 be IC111,1%,(1 ( .11c It a ball In pl.* ht.0111C, b1-01,(). NIIMild .1 leth,an,:d ' Ih ( join

RULE 13 The service is a let

(a) 11 hall seised (Wallies the n,:t, strap, 01 hand, and is otherwise good, or, atter touching the net, strap, or band, touches the recener of anything %%Inch he wears or carries het ore hitting the ground (I))IIa ,come 01 a fault is deiReleil A hen the let.oser is not ready (set. RuleI I)In case 01 a let, that palUtular Nemt.e shallnot count, and the servershall serve again, hot a sers ice let does not annul a pies ious taut(

RULE 14 When Receiver Becomes Server AI the end 01 the first game, the ret.eivei shall become ,river. and the server ret.eiveland so on alternately in all the subsequent games of a match. If a player serves out 01 the pla el who ought to have seised shall serve as 10011 as 111C mistake IS discovered, but all points seined before ',nth dis«wery shall he reckoned 11a game shall have been Lompleted before such discovers, the older of ',CIVIL' remains as altered. A fault seived berme stiIi distowo, shall not be teckoned RULE 15 Ball in Play till Point Decided A ball is in play horn the moment at svlut.,itis deliveted in seiviteUnless a laid( or a letis called, it temarm.1 play until Ilk point is lauded, RULES OF LAWN TENNIS AND CASES AND DECISIONS Case I. A ball is playedinto the net. the play el on the other that the ball is conune side, thinking over. strikes at it and hits the net Wholose% the point"' Decmori If a play et touches thenet while the hall loses the point %nil in play he

RULE 16 Server Wins Point The server %%ins thepoint (a)If the ball served, not being a let under Rule 13,touches the receiver or any thing whichhe wears 01 cartes befoie hits the ground. it (b It the receo.ct otherwiseloses the point as provided by I Rule

RULE 17 Receiver Wins Point The recenrei wins thepoint (a)It the serer sets es two'onseLutive taunts, ( b) If the server otherwise loses IS. the point as provided by Rule

RULE 18 Where Player Loses Point A player loses the point (a)If he falls, before the ball in play has hit the groundMice consecutively, to return itdirectly over the net (except provided III Rule 22a as (I) or c; or If he Mums the ballin play so that it hits thegr undi permanent fixture, or other object,outside any ofhe Imes which bound his opponent'scourt (except as provided in Rule 22a and c). or (e) If he volleys the ball andtails to make a goodMinn esen when standing outside thecourt. or (d)If lie touches or strikes the ball in play with his racketmole than once in makinga stroke. or (e) If he 01 his racket (in hishand or otherwise) or an> thing which he wears or carries touches the netposts. oi metal cable. strap, or band.or the pound within his opponent's court at any time while the ball (I) is in phi> . or If he volleys the ball beforeit has passed the net. (g)If the ball in play touches or hint or anything that hewears oi carries except his racket in his handsor hands, or (h)It lie throws his racket at andhits the ball 80 DG'%S TENNIS-BADMINTON-SQUASHGUIDE G. ..:-.: -, - = z?.E. i-,' r.

:, - .- = = - - , -4 ' -,'

-t - -_-. - - .:-.-,.. =

7. 7: ----. , ,--: ,, - = -- -,-.' - _ ;.-15;..-:. , -= ,--'::::--",--.. : ..--,: ,-=. -..., F.,--, - , ',.: 1 . , :,:TV:-.=:-:-.;-::::,,---..:=<, :2 ' E 7-7:-: ,=_._ = -.7,,,.....L, :-::::f:-0 ...... _ E.,-, 5 7 = -, : o = - :-. : , z 7 z: .,_. < = = '..' 7. 5 - ; E :=.: /-= 'J , -- '.'. . , z , = _ = = 0 -,-- -;...-17._ _ - to :-_ -: = _:.2. - =.. ;..-;--.; , ".%i.; 177 =' 7 = = '; ' 7, ;.Z 7.-, ::: -=::-.. ..= = -:-::: = ,..

-..

7,.,11 7-: ;c.-- ,-._ --, , = ::::±:,:." . .=: c..., = , =:, c,_ , - - ,...... rc

4 Di (num In ,,,,ord !Ike \Soh Ruk 1911,, umpii, either avardtier Point to the player hindered, or ord,r the point iok: r,plav,d ee alw Rule 21)

RULE 20 Ben Fallmg on Line Good

\ killtailing on .111111I. regarded as tailing in the ,otut houndLd bv that

RULE 21 Ball Touching Permanent Fixtures IIthe ball in play torkhes a permanent ti nu, tort,than tie ,,ord ot metal e,thtcsty, p l'I.111(1 Alit It11,1, hittIht ground, ill. pkiver whu.Itlt.k rtv, HisI. pointit h. ;oft it hits ilk grioand his oppom lit ulirtin point I return tut. the umpin 01 hi', I II or standI 1,e pia\ ,II1111. that th. Into the ,,not 1)11 mum lie

RULE 22 Good Return IN a good !et tit 11 (.1) the touLlies the net, posts (ld or metalable, strap or hand provided that it passes over any ofI herri this till. Liround 11111 the COWLof IhlIIthe hall, served or returned, hits the ground v\tthu the proper omit and rebounds 01 0 NOV, II badk over the net, andfie plav V. host ;tun itis to strike 'eddies and Prci.Y, the ball, piovided that neither he nor part 01 lollies '11',whet the netposts, ..01,1 ut midi straror band or the ground v, 'thin his oppor,;nr tots ,ind .11 Ilk stroke is ()them ise good, oi 1,1IIti e ball remitted outside the post, either above of belo,vtin %el ofthe top 01the net, even though toutiles inc..1051, provided thatithits the wound 55 1111111 the proper ts1111 101 (d)It a 44 cachet passes ovef the nettel he has returned the 11,111, provided the ball passes the ne being played arm Is properly returned or b e ) I 1a player sutceeds in returning the ball, sewed or in p1,1). , Muth strikes a ball iylug in the (mill ,Von II 11a singles matth, lot the sake of convemenLe1 doubles «nut is equipped with singles post, for the purr ise of a singles 82 DC7x/S TENNISBADMINTON-SQUASH C DE gaine,hen the doubles posts and those poi tions UI the net. Lord tit metal cable and band outside h time, he perindth:n t \ tore,, and ale not i d a, posts or p,ilts of the net of ,i saugle, game tetut n that pa,,,, under t net et'id bet micen the angle, and adid,ent doubles posts \ ithout eit het net sold, net, or double, poq, Mid fall, \\ it Inn t he area of hild,1, .1 gaud return ( as,/ hall goltw out rI Loult nits a nit poSt an,! tall, \\Him) linv .) tilt ,pponc rit's spurtIs the stroke vood 1)t chi i Itits rsi no tinder Rul, 9,It other Min I seethe St. undo I Runt 22a ( do 2Is it a 1...00ti icturn it., pla)er rt turn\ the 6,thhhohjitie his r,td.,,,t htith h Ind. ' /), hum es s.m.,, or li ill in tril.,:\ .1ball I'.SIC In iiik. sou, h sus point Si on 1 io.t iISIS PS /).(tome( \o Plan must LottttutteItit is twit dear to the umpire that the rte ht b ill is r, turned a lethould I,t ailed ( I\l.\ .1 plSr Usk. Wipes Mall OM 1IL INC!11 ins 11111L &Jinn! phis /Shin \o, The SSholr ruphs,ltnm of tilt Ink slit:.110 \i. er roiliest that a hall or kills It ill" III his orpoilL tit 1 Rfn,\.t1 /)« mot/ but not 55 hits 111, ball is in 1,1.1\

RULE 23 Interferance

In toe d pld et t, hindeted in making 1 stiol,, ant, th.ng not ,1111111 eLePI relitItmeril 11\1111',-it the ootii1 Ur eLel'l ds pi 'titled hot in Rule I')tht.' point shall be !cid,* ed I spec lalor art, IMO the of lilts c r 55110 talk to ft_ 1110 \la\ tilli la) er tht n claim a let' /)ii run Yes,itintne tinipir,'s opiniontiewas obst rot ledl's ,thunistan,e he\ ond his L. Mr01 but not it due to permanent II \ tut,. of the court or tla. ,111,1111..111(111 of the rrou d ( as( 2 A phi \ ti i, int,itert d \\ its in Case IInd the intim Lath a let Ili, ,'nee had pri'vlotisl) seri,edfault Ilas .lie twhi to riio smites' /)«rcr,/ Yes. as the ball isin play. Int'pint. 1,01 !nerd) the stroke, ' lust he 1,11.11Ld its the ride peptide, ( est 3\1.1)a at Awn a let1111(...'1 RilIC 2Imes itise he thoutdit his opponent was long hindeicd. and.thsequentl di I not c \ petit the ball to be turivial /)« man No. ( as, 4 Is a when a ball Iii ph', hit, another bail in the du' i)ethrou A lei should tie tailed unless the 0 het ball is in the air IS the 0'1 "I one "' the PLO ensin Mils h Lase the umpire will de( ide under Rule 19 Caw 5itin umpire or other tedlie eironeousls r out,- dad own t nn', is himsett salts "pla \ " whtth oh the calls slimed pre\ ad) RULmS OF LAWN TENNIS,NO CASES ANDDECISIONS 83 De(iiwt A let must he(.11led, unless, in the opinion of the umpire, 'hither pI.iet 1%,1, hindered inits %line. in Much case the corrected l,111 shall pre%ail ( 511 an ummte or other nadi!e :rroncousi -tault- or -ow,- and that corrects himself and calls -nla%-,hid' of the aalshould prL Diusion1 let must bk. (Alai unless. illIllopinion 01 Olt umpit, nether pia% er \\ a, hindered eat his gam, ut 1,111,h case the,orTL,;,,i hall shall preill 1 interterna2 Inc (ac, ( 11 the lust hall seseised 1. a.au.,t rol repass at the time of the sewn,' nc, Ina% the receBer claim a let' 1)5tt+nt tits Ihh had an ,pporttinft\ to renuoe the hallI rom the court and taftc(1 to do so, tic tn,e, not dam) a let Is ii a '10,0 strol,e it the ball tom hes a stationar, Or unnint, olnect on Oa court' IS171Itis a rood ,frok, unto, the stattonai% oluect c,tillinto file ,oliff aff,r tk. hall Va, put unto pl.*. in V, ha h case a "IX' musthi WedIt the hall in phi%so-lists an oblect t00% nig. alor1r or jhot, the suriacc of the court. alet'' must he called Hahne 11 the first seri,he is a faith. th. second l 11 ill cort4ct, .111dit hccomes nece.saQ, to either under the procnaonof Rule_ it the umpire is unable to decide the point' he I Cult ,h,tll i c at,nulted and the \\ hole noun replaed

RULE 24

The Game

Ita In` his lust point, the SCOrl is calledI c lot that plaNeion \sinning his second pointthe score is called 30 tot HIM plasei011 alining his thnd pointthe stole is called 4(1 for that player acid the fourth point \\ on b a pla yer is scored game tot that player. except as hams It both pla CIS have \kw) three r( Otisthe score is L'alkd dense, and Ith.'nest point 5\00 by a player is called adsa,itager that playerIf the same plaei \sinthe next point, he \sins the game, it the other player ssins the next point, the score is ,:gain called deuce and so 00, until ,tphi>ei- 551n, the IWO points IninWahately IolioWing Ilse score at deuce \, hen the ;tame is scored to; that planet

RULE 25

The Set A play etI (I, pla eis)im wins six gdt.,es,51, ins a set, e thathe must smiibya maigm of atleast two games °se' ht, opponent where necessal, , a set shall be extended until the, margin is hlc\ed 84 DGWS TENNIS-BADMINTONSQUA' RULE 26 When Players Change Sides I he players shall Change sides at OIL end ot the lustthird. and C%Cf, subseqoent alternate game ot e,Ji setanti at the L nd set unless the total number oi game, in suili set is e...n. 111 \(111(11 Lase the Jiang,.is not made untiltie ot the I IN( gjin. ,11' ILe i1C \t sit

RULE 27 Maximum Number of Sets \lammunt numbei t,tset`,in matLlf shall ht tie, 01v. here women rah. rat t,

RULE 28 Rules Apply to Both Sexe,

\t. cl'ts heft: (Ahem e% el Ten in rule, I" list ma,uline mt.lutles the tenilnine gLrqiel

RULE 29 Clecisnws of Umpire and Referee

In ?whin!. %%here an (Millieis.i1,1,01fitClihis det shallht. Imal but Mielea icleiee is appointed,an appeas:fall he to him !tom the deoion of.111 lllliplle Off .1 citICs11011,4 1,1v,,ind :n NUL ii the diiiston 01 the retiree shall be I mai I he teter:e, at his dNiletfon, otr(fill' a 111.thi1 (Ill.1011111otdarkness or the Londition (r1th, ghrund Ofthe of postponement, the PR,""N ,"th. and 1;ler prortrus oicupani ,ourts sh.li hold g00,1, arl. the plaers (mammon* agreenlhi1\tIse

RULE 30

PIA>11.111 be L,)nlinti,03 11(611 'hi titi .i1\10: till the that( his Loniliniedpto% itled111.1. Ater thud set or. %%hell %%omen take part, the set,ond set. eithet plaer nt riled to ,1 test v.h,,fi not es,,eekt ten nntinte or in ,orin betv,e,:n tatihnteI

noith and latitudt. 1 so it h. minute.. and pro% Ale(' further that %%Mu rieLessttait,ti ')% nianistames nor v .11111 Chi 10111 101 rd the pia> eqsIii, ipire rha 5115, eild play tot NMI,fpvIlt)(1 ',C ton-atter note . -',leyItj 1y suspended and is no, resumed until a (,11 11 da,. the test Illaht.Liken ()111atter the third setI %%hen

RULES OF LAWN TENNIS ANC CASES AND DE&.ISIONS 85 tf omen take part, the set pla) on sut h later da)t kunplet,on an tint unshed set being k.l)11111ed as 0.11, setI hese pro% 151 (115 shall he strKti),ton strut d, and play shall reset he suspendetl.delayedor inteiteied ith for the purpose of enanlingplayer to reLoer strength or tw, v, and, or to retene instt union tu atkiceI lte umpire shall he the sole fudge of -lath suspension. delay or intertelente,and titer giN mg due Naining, he rn,ly disqualit) tht of fender Aot

/ xplatrat, 'II Rtik;(i mat,h Itl111C11 the'. Is 110 test111 ,11\NO-0{11-01-ifilte but ill.1 three -out 01-1 1%e-set matt!" .1 ten minute rest ma)he take). 0u11) after tilt third ,e1tt ma! not he taken beforehe third set or at an) time atter the tourth set has t stalledIt must he taken atter (lie set a'? 1101 .11 Ai In On1. 111.0, hes .1lest (11 I.i rotnutes 111,1.\ he taken attet the set.011tise1 01 t'01,11,111 In,th ilestt tJuniois shall he the b..st 1.,No-out-ot-thieesets %trillno restinthe!'.Ise it tenniscenterthampionships IT nth ist 1101,vAlt, 1I e and 10111 i(Itiril,11M`nt \ eq1nAjlent /,, tenth (emits aad in N.11011,11 11111101 ( hai)inon,lps the!111.1 toutid be the hest !the: fmt-of-liNe setsIt Ut.11 final It anti require than th sci, 1,, dCt.1dC, 11:1t: 111111 he a 'est oi ten minutes :tit! the thit.et Malt Itt.,' )0%, and gillsI cand t)delshallI ethe hest \ko out-of -thrte .1.1(.11 Ill I k MUS1 1C11 1111111thIts? ,.11k1 11 .t.,(11(1 .1 thel Hill tes I .t 11,11:ii. ,'pi`'( 50.: 111,)titti, tt,,t1 (h' tir,i 1,1()%1Ntoniii I.iiieZt) t() ploNide Old!,)fltr tieNe,(id.ct ills \kitiNo.cltot In p+ 10111 11.1.1 'Os 1011.11 1.. :11' 111,1T 011011ble., is en1 11 I, 1,) 1, 51 55 tm shall not \-oed ten nun ' 11111"hock on the t0l..t ten nullifies r pia) has tisecl note,' plas. (,11M.( 41111 01 101111 toss01 .111 111111,01(1,thle .1((111(' it his0/11101he u)atoe I,) .')11l mire I):.\, Le 11111 atI itlittd 86 DGWS TENNISBADMIN fON.S.AUASH GUIDE Shit is one of the li,,ndes; things :0 Jed I IA01 the rules S.1.

111`11 ;hi hillhe ,ontinuou. An unipre should deternin,e %ttellier theStalling' IS(1 ellhetatt and tot the purpos.: gaining timeIt he dek Ides that ittsIn should %% III) the phit er to stop Ins u', .1r this dots not ,d he should then detault him I he iiinvIre has the pm% et to sospendmat, h to; such pelit,d .1, is* 111.1. think neessar).. itin tudgment, the plan is interfered that! iunstar.es het and "le plateis. (ontiolStith (IrLtsin- staho.., ;night he MI: passing of dt,:whin.ino5 lug ot spetatot, t he stands. elk (47%, I xpla)Cs SII I in'' ear 0 0101101 t tit k (rMes (it .1..1111,11111,1i 111 11 a \%.17.that V. N 11111,1,,Ibk 1 1111diqt,IN, hut 1+. 10.1% 01*..11(1C(.1 ithil, the 111.11.1diu.im r101,(1' 11 n 0,.111, in k 1,11111,(.111.A., ;1,1 %%1111111 111k stunt ,1tht pl a 01 %. tlIT, ki111,1,.iik i, th, 11111i01.: I, 11:' sot. ItIdesa u.pc,11.401;

. It ,%%. i112 .i:1 VIA\ T i,(111.1hlt ..01111TItit' 111110tihilk I% I,11,v,.. .11% 1111,1 1..Ihtrunt (NM, %%h/kbIs1d \ he so, I's I)" 1," 1113,1c h.,11 11 ph 11 hidithis n Ili.,,hs tiiII 1,i I.:r .1 id:Altai 1, tthi%

1 11111 1 I ( a, i 11111111 itSlits 111 \ 11s t ibi taunt r, L,nt is 5,4;irt ,1.11!lit 1,111 Is to;

/) 5/50 I Is',111pli it 11111I1,1% Is t4111111111,11, :15105 1,1'11' Tills 711(1 iht third is I 1111 Rills, 1111

THE DOUBLES GAME

RULE 31

11),)1,,At. ids - sh 111..1,1 Itits the Wolf,1( .15 1,, 1(1\%

RULE 3? Dimensions of Court

I (n the dou1s1,', game, the iuuit Is 15"7I in it idi ( t(itv,idet rash siiik '11.111Illt 0111 1,0111(singles gauntand piiitonsItthe singles side line, ttluttiI10 to 1 \%k t11 111 ,C11.1..tlines s 1.0.1 he ...ailed the setkike side line,In IS,Nrs's, the omit tiIth, to that ii Ruh 1.but rott theIllgIes side1111( s \\es 11111C 1),INClinedrill MC ,,(1%10" 1111k .111C of the net mat he (1111111V11 it (1CSIIC11

( altIIn (1,111'1' Tit (111111, 114' 111 ofr is sitb.71, d111,10 sine 11Th 'hiI". -1:011" ,(41-11 01 RULES OF LAWN TENNIS AND CASES AND ')ECISIONS 87 neLessao that the sercer stand +.1thin the limns ot ire center mark and the singl, side 11;1.2' Decisionthe se/ler was the nght to stand aniskinre betvoeen tit, t ente, mark and the doubles side line

RULE 33 Order of Service The order of serving shall he decided at beginning of each set foaows I he pair who have to serve in the first game ot each set shall decide which partner shall do so. and the opposing pair shall decide SIntilady for the second game The partnei of the player echo sered in the first game shall serve in the third. the partmt ot the player who served in the second game stilll serve in the lout th, and in the same order in all subsequent games of a set Case IIn doubles. one player does not appear m time to pin.. and his partner elanns to be allowed to p16 single-handed a:tainst the opposnw players \I.iy he do so' Deersi.,,1 No

RULE 34 Order ci Receiving

Ale orderofreceivingtheset viceshall be decidedatthe beginning of each set as follows Tne pair who have to lec,:tve the service in the lust game shall decide which partner shallreceive inth firstsell, R, and teat partner shall continue to receive the lip:CIN ice in every odd game throughout that set The opposing mar shall likew .se decide winch partner shallreceive the firstseivicc the secod game and that partner shall continue to receive the Ins( ser,,ce to every even game throughout that setPartners shall receRe the service alternately throughout each game

I: ulna 1 IonojRule The receiving formation of a doubles team may not be changed during a set, only t the start of a new setPartners mustI carve throughout each set on the same sides ofthe court wha

RULE 36 Error in Order of Receiving

11dUr:ng a gaille the order ()I teLening the ser\ke iti hanged the ,e,"ters a shall remain as altered until the end ot the game in %%hid: th,. mistake is dis,oerect. but the part nets shall resume ineli orIgIllai order of re.ening in the nett game of that set in %%Inch they ate reo..ners ot the set%h:

RULE37 Ball Touching Server's Partner Is a Fault Hie sertke is a iatlit pro%ided for btRule tl. or itthe ball set ed touches the s,fleiN pattner or ant thing he tt cars or carries but ittha hail sened touches the pat tiler of the recener or ant ming %%Inch he %%cars or ..imes not being a let under RuleI 3a, bet,eit hits the ground. the serwr v,,ins the point

RULE 38 Ball Struck Alternately he ball shall be orm.t alternatelt bt one or the other Pia> the opposing pairs and i a plater tom hes the ball ul plat with his raChet itt omitatentioli of this ri.lehis opponents ti,in the point

RULES OF LAWN TENNIS AND CASES ANO DECISIONS 89 CONDITIONS GOVERNING TENNISPLAYERS

Section 1 I lit.'tollosk 191.1 rt ,,ttenno ',1)1/1 IA It :111) he wri.dikt tort ol thr 1 SII b; Pla

Section 2 !la, no! cizoN cr 1111Utql7S.1, fly Al./11ti IN ; dirk', I it.51 .116.1 r1:\ 1.1111.fr kept e rt.'d flt.. d,rn,,n,trAing ,,r ptir,urtoi the garnc, t. mated bthe t SE 1 A anisimir11111 not bc iicein,'Alto hate rs'.1`,.11')1 dli41/11.1::C* 11. t t,..4,(atablc cch,c, a; Liall intnircd II)heln)7. rLishbur,ctt ti hint In Vv ittlit'. patirtAwn lit a toulnainLiit. rn,u, 4T i. \ 11,li, a .kholarqii; (a ,11.c Ibcri.'Ilh. ai111141/,..d 1'II'S the reopini (I. mil hr).1.1, ,u; unier.it. Cliglhil".1, .1tenni, 1%1$>,1 1,1 ski..1 \ 11001

Section 3 dn.,. Jgc tat, ,,I te;,i1,, cligrbk 1,)It pc 1,,;,.1:1,iratein ,1 un ILI l`P!.Lars,,1 be I,I 2,)('d ,t,111.111i$2, tow ,lainentmat, ii I \1{11,111, ilgiiLIT:,)n

Section 4 111 and Iiiii .. fit id %%Ito tic' .1111 111,1 If:. be II1.,11I.11.11 1.'d 4, 1,1,1N di 11 go.,d indintz V itt th ISI I\ .11 i

Section 5 1,111 11.1111c Ills, 111, ,i11k1 rid% CI, `,11,111 PLC% 1 AI !t.6.(.1t'tic ma? )1, 11,101 V itate \an, :1,11,,,i la cr. mal. cornretc ill.III I . and b ill>Tilts ur, and (,1is. &It 1,,11, 1 us i.1at '1 5 OA I,'" 11,1111l 111 111.11 ',/11 11,1111, 111,Ina 11( 1 Ski ,11 h'' ; .it I\ 11 ; ,11; 1.1p.11. \ 10k .1111 It

Section 6 .1: .111d V, ill IA I'. .1111,1111I ,1 Ati .11 I,1,1d'111,11 fit 1, IsIt 11 5 II It, v trig GUIDE 90 OGWS TENNIS-BADMINTON-SQUASH Par, iLipation in an unaailioi:ted .otnpetition (h) Via) ing wrmime} pt lit or gate teLeipts Phi} mg. 1.1,,(,1gor demonstrating the game lev.t.pt aothot lied in Set tit 4.)t this Art rile). (di,\ L,epting mone} ga1111112 athantage,10111 pt.rmitting name or likeness to he atheitiied aN the user of an goods or a 111.111k1I.R.itin.A. meri.hant, 11hole.aietrt. taller or otil,rv, Ise re) 1'mnd r,og toking of ation Jilin of Itinhelf and I ing ratio,f retol If \ilt,tul,g Ins nain: to he used as, IIauthor 01 an} hook or on ten.asithe isin 1,10.1 not the anti r01 I)}rei.ening pa} inent forse,i. does not actuail% tender. dr.),Aft Iv mg the use of his name or likeness on spoi ring 1100015 or itatl ad% el or otliL isales piorm)tion tfslit h 1.t0Ods 1h) lepoiting or o litilittitleinthe press. radio or IV for mon.\ ofit,ran L onside:allot) an}tourthin,:nt.maid) or inhitioh in v. Int. li he I" par tiL !paling. Pla} ingII. tournament, mat, I:or e.hilldion %%here iit101 h penses ale paid. unless sut.li this been sant. honed of ,lpptrntd ht thtI. SI 1 A if)\hiking an} t angLinent cliret I}%%Rh a tor,igif national as.sok1.11 1011,ail .1 t tut,vithout thetonseatofthe l'SII\ Ioici,ii11 Noin mote ti mnaments. mateiles 01 ethibitions heduleil to he pla}Lilit the same time or ,nininting orali mitt! to pia; and tamhg to appear or \t ting in a mantic,. detimictitai %%clime of the gaint

Section 7 (A) \ 111,1 C11(i1 into 1)011,1lok .11 1.111g...111CW 101 hp. it .111 111p1o CC .111 an fit r a0,11S1llii111)Mi it h a mann! .ii.ttm I01 .tilt 101 .10111111: goods or yt lief1,1 ',LIMN IiIONILICLI 1 he Nei% li.Cs 10 he perrotined ill not tu,latt sit, 1 lhcse itgulat ions t poll (lie vt Men request id the Rill:\ allot Discipline Committee of the t'SII\ of theI \ eL unix II A dillInNtld 0111(111t let' 011 he t SII .in aniateut shall IhilIr11110! in .11011 Committee Oct the details of an}01n0.11 wiiingement, imitating thefunishing to Nth( °In- tteLo; an} v I it ten agreement ,otiespondeni.e and memoranda thereto, and tmluding a sm. orn statement a. to silo It tietails 11 so I eiitiesIed lb)t potIh.ttlltttire.,tiestofthe11tiles and1),st mime ( otninitteeofthe I \ tr 11C \cttiiI C 01Atimmlist!,11 ic ( 011111111 1ii'L 01theUSI I\,,In%smitten!shallfull}ilitof ( "Inn" i" Paid LormeL t ion v ith his partiiipa CONDITIONS GOVERNING TENNIS PLAYERS 91 lion in any tournament niatdior e 1101111mi inLluding the 1u:rushing tosuLli( ommittee ot such additionalintolination as may he requested, and including s1t. I, requested h e \penses itNI.) te)Failure 10 pionwily and fully with and 0) abo\e will be pounds par agiaphs tal to! immediate suspension, whyh susi,Liision shall Lontinue until theamateur his so Lomplied with such lequest

Section 8 Anundelgraduatt, of a graduate studentin regulai atterkhnke It'Lognutpl 'high Lollege of UIt11t'I,lt1, 01 taLulty membei as desmbed d in Section helot 1111.1 not lose ainatem status beLause ot a...Lepting employmentas A Loanseloi at a summerLamp °I 11.9 an assistant to,, teaching professional or ILIin employee or tennis instructor ata dub or establishment whtie 1..nnis is play ed.or Id) an CISIp10>et, or tennisinstructot ot a Sectional in 91,4110 assoLiation otthe l..H!.;1I A, acity tqW,,,iknt, Or a rcLogniied tennis reLication depaitment ofIts tel p,1(1011S Olg,i111/M1011, el111)10, MeinInapublic Junior deelopmsnitplogiam Remuneration tot an:.such employ ment may only beon a ti \ed et.lsly of monthlyoasis and may not be on a lesson 01 !wilily basis I Ms set. tioi:is not applkable to an .11' Ilehl nallon,1111 In the t.tst twenty V.114)Is railed

Section 9 Regular tup,.ifine members ot the Iatulty 01 a teLogruiL4high school, college of universitymay teach tennis to the pupils or Load' thetennis team aspart01 thenfaculty aticonig then amatew standing assignments, without

Section 10 a IWilelle1er tilargeS ,ae madeagainst a pep on 0; a Lioltion ahy aniatein regulation andare tiled in wilting with the Rules and DisLipline Committee. the Lhanman of such Committee and the president, aLtmg faintly,ate smipoweled to suspend sudi pending a healing beloie sash prison Committee and the meadent.01 pending a heating before thepresidentor the thairman 01 such Committee, or an} other memberot sudi Committee who ma's be designated by the chairman to .inductsoot hearing, which heating shall be held piomptly followingIlk tiling of such chalges (b) hollowing any such suspension and heating, , written report and recommendation shallmomptly be submitted to the 92 DGWS TENNIS- BADMINTON-SQUASH GUIDE I V' t U111 onmuttee of the US1, TA, \kind' Committee need not ,udth.t a hut her heating before hn,tlly a,ting oo the mattes Such 1 mai at. non ma, he a min) of such suspension, 01 a C01111111.1a11011 of su,.11 suspension toa spetilied period of tune, of a dIst111.11111Ca- 11011 ut NMI] person as an amatemAn:1/4 such action must ha e the tontuireme ofa m.1;0111:1/4 o'the membeis oftheI XCCIlle Committece of th,('SLI'A. (L)\ny person %%Ito has been disqualif led b%the I'xecutive Committee of the USLTA ma be iemstared b.,lien ('oimmttee on c'1/4 nleme stistak.toi; to it that Rmstatement is mei it.A1

Section 11 Wheie used herein la) the mastAMth pronoun shall be k hangtd to the temmine when the person im1/4011,ed is of the tenunine ill Iaperson', nameIncludeshisinitialsand n oilier 10. 10 it h.at ion 01 his Id Wit:, and te.. lung nh. tildes o).n. lung and 111Ifti, I mg

Reprinted by pefIllISS1011()1 the USI IAI hew regulations seer adopted the USI I A Annual Meeting in Coronado, California on I ebruary 8,I 96f), and they amend :he old Wide Ill of the ASSMiation's 13 y Inquiri:s should he duet led to the USI- I A, 51I 42nd St., New York, N 10017 CONOPTIONS fl.CVERNING TENNIS PLAYERS 93

A 4 USLTA TOURNAMENT REGULATIONS

I ht. ournament Regti1alion, heleindi ter Lont.iincLi and the otI .H\ ell1UN Shall he ph.,ere,i thimighout dit tompattlept, helu b assoLiations 1-telon1.41ng doe,t1.\ (it InitteLtt toih noted States I a \\ nI ennis \,..,0Liattott \o Lheeks pa !news in an\ tot in 111.111 he .U\ en .1, prisesI he \ t)1 t price shall not he ad\ el UsedII an} Aallengy Itp I, Ot lei ed, it 1htill he deeded to the 1'Sii\ or to the ,e,tional ass,,,tation ha\ mg twiskit,..tittn ot the e\ent tot\\Ink h up is donated I he\ \ libidoot d Lhallenge shallhe entitledto possessIonotih,,tip 1111111 one monthpie hill,to thelie \t Inpei tor the tiled he 41\ C hund satistatorto III,' Utah Should the dui) go.t: po,sessionit hunt su h hond it shalt he Bailie to the l Si I \ tonal .xssot.Lat ion for the \ Atte ot the up \11, ,haiienge ,,1p, pi thou' deeded to the ("SI] \ for t Si I \ ,hamplon.d,,p, (Si I\ and Intilnaio'al te.inlin a IheN .11,411, upon reque,1 ickolulu,n ,c,i, .10, hit ion fiaIng 111,11,, ot the c, nt tor\\ dcd,',1 To ,11,I1 Lit he litt R.:..1 theI. itib ill tiai Men! 11,111 \ lull pm\ er o\ ,..1Alltic tails ,,,itLyttungt h. ornamentI he\n' \ th,..ttrisel\ cs ..,t as th,.- nainent ,onintit tee and \\ Ill he st) unless the\ delegate their autliotit \t,c toilets (Int \ 'I' Ina \ hold antIti,.1.11 posit 'oil suLlt ,1'tetete., ot t.hantnati ot 1 ,olippttice that 1,ieSPOnSible t the( SII \ the totn,lut.tot ( SI ,l1 ,e,li<,ndl/10111piondlip 4 \ shall he issated b the olmilit Ice spc,it tri!.., the kond (ions ot tompetitiot,, and in,luttite th, name, of th, notice and ot th, teteree, I hr Lommittee cle,t d \\ ith po et to ,;ppottll a,1.11)N111111e I he tetetee 01 his suhstittlit 11111,i he ple,111 at ,Ili 11111c, ,\heft 111,1,I, In 111(),,Z;cN.

/ ielete tna \not monopole or pat Ilk watt: in .1 tn.111 unless he appoints a sul,,,ttipte to a,l a., tel \\ tuft he unipli Ing t1 pi.Q,Ing () 11;0 let CIVC "halt du, the touttlatnent ,,t; kto titenth,.!, LomMitCe he olontittee shall keep ()Riot ((Ti the pounds and shall deide an\ question Alistng out to the ,ompet t l iph. e,ept a pot] 1 t \\,ti summoned tot that 11,111)0,eht.,,the teicree an\ Ix\ o then ntinilm and the\ shall II Re p(met\\ hen so um\ citeditthe

Puprifitt,d as %thrift«, In permission of th(I `,1I\I or «filiplete tiff ormatioa see th( I Inpue s Vnua! 1,111)11%1st' In the 1111 I\ 94 OCAVS BADM'NTON SQUASH GU:DC Im,,ondui I ot .1 ,ompetitut he repotted 'o them hisa inembet ot the his an umpire, to disquald>the offender altei .1 hearingI he inembeis ot the eommittee pies,it on the grounds shall ,(mmtutequoium I he 1..teice ofhis suhstttute shah has" p(mot to appoint and icmose umpoes and linesmen. to assign cowl,. and to stall m itchesI he melee shall decide an) point of Inch umpire Ina%his unahli t4, decide, ot %%Inch mitts he reletred to hint on appeal OU theci.c st ilit an :unpile such decision shill he tmal unless reecised h the t titI \I \ccutiee ( 01111111nee 4,1,1k1 to .1tiest the scoring of a match, an a;,lal101st he tak,.ii to thetetcle... immediate!) and pla suspende II :tiding the 11.% iStirn Mitch thelc:lc:lieshall make loithecithIn general, a 01I lie CC*, decision h\ theI \ecutiee ( omuoitee shall no' cause reopening of the match meoleed, ..inch shall stand as but su. h iceeisal shall constitute a precedent lotIntuit: cisiohsIlnvvrvc1, %%hen the decision conceit), the imal 111.1Itliol 101.1111,1111C111 and the interest, of justice so !equip:. theI \ ecutiee ommitice mayIllits kilstrel ion ay.aid the match to the aggi weed oi (leiit Icphi eel I hedecisionotantumuleshallhetonal upon ever) question ot tact and no competitor tnaappeal 11on1 it, but it an umpue isin doubt a, to a point of ofit a eompetr,oi appeals How hitsdek ',don,the umpne shall submit the question to the titelee, echo,e decision shall he final, unless teecised h the t SI I A I \eiitit.e W11111111CC A plestIOn 01ListteLtIes to eeents that occurred 1 questionot laNc isthe constluction and application ot the tides ot the game to the admitted tact, IDI he !deice ton, \\het het appealed to h. an) competitor notpostpone the meeting, ot an,. match or part ot a match. it inits opinion the state ot the %%eat het, (n of the light, ()I ot the condition ()I the pound, 01 0111e1 tenders ad\ isable to do so II In all tournaments and matches sanctioned h> the ['SII A. the use ot spikes is prohibited unless the retetee shill determine that pound conditions iustit their use, I he use ot spikes longei than 3 8 otan inchismoluluted under an cucumstancesIn such toutnament, or matches plaed on an sintace ()the] than pay,. heelless Ilat-soled shoes must he \coin Shoes has mg heelsma) not he es, out on an, pining lace I 2 Ita ,..onipentoi is not tead. when called upon to plat and has not been e\cused, he m i he defaultedIt, allet play begins, a lads to continue lequited by the Inks, through Illness or other cause, his opponent 'hall he entitled to\cm, %%Inch shall he scot ed recoiding the sets and games limhed and adding the \cold "tented, e.g, A (Ideated R. 3-6. 4-2, tented,

USLTA TOURNAMENT REGULATIONS 95 13. The referee shall not bet on any match, nor shall an umpire or hnesman bet on the match to which he is assigned. An infraction oftins rule shall be followed by the Immediate removal of the offending referee, umpire, or linesman. 14.It is the duty of an umpire (a) To ascertain that the netis the right height before the commencement of play, and to measure and adjust the net during play atter each set and other times, if asked to do so, or if in his opinion its height has altered. (b) To call service faults, lets, outs, and foot faults unless such powers be delegated to linesmen or net umpire. Lxp/anutronIn matches where there are no 12)e linesmen the umpire shall judge foot faults, but should call0,'y those that are perfectly obvious from his position in the chair. (c) To call the points when won, or when he is asked to call them, and to record them upon the scorecard (d) To call the games and the sets at the end of each, or when asked to call them, and to record them or the scorecard. At the end of each game, the games should be called with the name of the player who is in advance, thus. "One game to nothing, A leads,- or "two games to B leads." If the games are even, the score should be called thus' "Three games all,- or as the case may be, At the end of each set the sets should he called in like manner te) To direct the competitors to change sides, in accordance with Rule 25. (f)When appealed to (Irmo& a rally, whether or not a doubtful ballis "in play,'' say4crthing: an appeal should not be made, as the ball is pia tuned to be r. J until "out- of "fault" is called. Case I.A ball was driven to the bay: :me of the opponent's court The latter was in doubt whether it was ood or not and called to the umpire for a decision, there beim no Imesmat ,The umpire, not being able to give an instant decision, said nothu.g. Ph.v continued, ind finally the player olio asked for the decision knocked the ball out of court. The umpire had by that time confirmed his firm impression- thatthe disputed ball was out and awarded the point to the player %% ho had, in the course of the rally, knocked the ball Out Was the umpire right'' Deersum Yes. Explanatron "hisdiffersfromtheoldregulationswhich rnstructed the umpire to call "play'', heis now directed to say not lung. (g) To decide all doubtful or disputed strokes subject to the decision of the lmesman, and all points of law, subject to an appealtothereferee,todecide when new balls arc required, subject to the approval of the referee and to be 96 DGWS TENNISBADMINTON: SQUASH GUIDE responsible for the proper conduct of the match, including its discontinuance, subject to the approval of the referee I.rplunuttonfhe latter part of this regulation gives authority to the umpire to stop a match On account of light, ground, or weather conditions, subject to the referee's approval (I)fo see that play is resumed promptly at the expiration of time allowed for rest pla natio nPlayers must return to the court ten minutes atter stopping play. Iiifo sign the scorecard and to deliver it at the conclusion of the match to such person as the committee may authorize to reeeiveit,provided that no omission of any of the foregoing duties on the part of an umpire shall of itself invalidate any point, game, or match. 1 5.Itis the duty of the linesman to call faults, and to decide strokes ;elating to the line or lines to which he is assigned, and to said line or Imes only, and such decision shall be final Should the linesman be unable to give a decision, the umpire may call upon another linesman to do so whose position is such as to enable him to givea comet decision, or lie may direct the stroke to be played again. Case Ithe ball strikes the ground close to a line, the umpire scores the point against the player stho last struck the ball. On appeal to the linesman, the :after decides that the ball was not out The umpire must then order the point replayed. I'splanatrun1 he USIA A I. \ecutive Committee has ruled that in accordance with Rule 23, Case 5, a linesman has the power to comet a mistaken decision which he has made 13y this is meant that when a linesman calls a ball "out that lie immediately realizes was good, he should instantly apprise the umpire of his error. The umpire then must order the poet replayed unless in the opinion of the umpire neither player was hindered in his game, in which case the corrected call shall prevail. 16. A competitor may appeal to the referee for the removal of the uniplle or any linesman of his match. Fa. Nu oat ion Therefereeshouldgiveconsiderationtothe reasons why f'f, removal is requested and act only if they are well founded, vi'' simply on a competitor's objection

, competitor may (twister his entry to another player. IS Competitors shall have the right, by themselves orihetr deputn s, to be present at the draw. HOW TO MAKE THE DRAW 1 9. When the number of competitors is 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, of any higher power of 2, they shall meet III pairs. in accordance with the system shown by the following diagram USLTA TOURNAMENT REGULATIONS 97 13

1) ) DI 1)

20 When the number of(ompetitors is not a power of 2, tri.. e ',hall be by es In the first round1-he purpose of haying byes is to bring into the second rounda number of competitors thatis a power of 2,to determine the number ofoyes, subtract the number of competitors from the next higherpower of2 to determine the number of competitorsin the first round, subtract the number byes from the total number of of competitors, If the byes are eyentit number, one-halt of them shall beplaced at the top of the draw and one-half at the bottom of the draw,if they are uneven in number, there shall be one more byeat the bottom than at the topI he be in the top shall be the names first drawn.The next names drawn shall be placed in the first round"1 he byes In the bottom halt drawn last. are

Series 1From 5 to 8 Competitors Ma bye) - --

131 c I A 1) (a bye) I) (a bye) Ij I. With () there will be I bye at the top and1 bye ,t the bottom, with 7, 1 bye at the bottom,with 8, no byes

RULES FOR SEEDING THE DRAIN 1, AB championships and other sanctioned tournaments shall havea seeded draw conducted in accordancewith the following rules a. The committee charge of a tournament shall have lull in making the draw, power b. The number of seeded playersshall be determined by the committee, subject to the limitationIli it not more than One player be seeded for every eightentries 98 °GINS TENNISBADMINTON-SQUASH GUIDE IIt%%,) are to he .ceded numbeisi and 2 .Ile;' drm the sust Braun snail be placed at the top oi the upper halt, the sk.,ui at the bottom ot the totter halt Iitout me to he seeded. numbeis 1 and 2tie treated ab \ umbers and shall he dt %iv. btbr and last dr .%%ti.hall he plated .it the top it the .e and quartet the .aloud shii he plated it the bottom ot the thud quaitel It more than lour are to be seeded,;del to thet 1/41 I\ 1 tr,

3 1 he names ot all unneeded competitors shall he dumn at land,in and topied onto the dra%% sheet in the oidei

SANCTION RULES

I utnaments seeking USII\ sanction should applyto;11VI: st'it Wild! .1,s0C111,o11. aC eirty as possible 2 \ complete report ot notches plaed in the iot1111,111)Clit must he Itnnished tothe USI i\ °like u.ontaming lull unties and addresses ot ,ontestants (%)..hete possible) %%ithin ten das atter the completion ot the eelit

1 Allpl!.,ers t ompeting ina sanctionetournament must hate membership III theI.. SI I A I he lee i. s4 tot adt;ifs and s lfor tumors ApphLation blanks ale obtainable irons se,tionalhair- men

SUGGESTIONS FOR MODIFIED RULES Alasi, teat hers hate toituested intormtion regarding the kind ot modith_i(iiins thattorrid he made tot inaishes %% Itsn 11111e Is .1 1,1001 Some possible suggestionsarelisted beim% Although unottulat these rules .1150 appear in the riot) °Mod] t SI 1\ealbool, and I emus (;Mete

Rules of VASSS Single Point

V \ SSS alternate tennis scoring s> stem tt slit h .resit es a game simpler to understand. schedule (settakes 10 minutes), and handicap (bettet thangoll 1It also abolishes the marathon set, by mtioduting the VASSS pout tiebreak, All USII A rules apply except in son nig,

1 It is sone(' as at table tennisI. 21. 4 2 1 he serve changes tiom A to B eer), .1 pis O. 10, 15)Iles sequence is called a "standSerte Changes .itthe end ot toe set, hut tinsside USLTA TOURNAMENT REGULATIONS 99 Hie histrtin:n ea,h "hand- is served into the right forehand ,curt or 4 Sides \ -Si ale ,hinged the odd hand, S pist 5-15-25) 5 1 he of likhd setis !Red at 31 points But %%here tune 's ata premium, 21 points mal. ust.d oit rhea t, no umpire the serveris required to call sore loud and lea A ter tad) point he winnei ot the set must lead by A least 2points t 31-2q) sIt the score is tied A 30- +0 inpoints in the set. or 1-1 in sets in a 2-set mata (see Rule`.4) 5 out offi points arc PLO,. edto de, ide the k% tr'neti his istiled the tiehreak. In the tiehreak, the pia), ers spin the ra,ket1 he %%inner A the "spin- has ,hoite of serving first, 1I, 2. 5, (ti or B, (3. 4, -, 9) or 01 taking Lhoke 01 sides (North- South)Semi e ( & B) ,flanges Ater 2 points (2. 4 61 Sides (N-S)are ,hanged Ater 4 pointsli may choose to serve the "th and I inalpoint either lett rightI I ollov serving sequence on diagram )1 he loser of the lit...breakshall commeme serving in the followingset vvithoui hanging sides, II)In doubles, the ,ante pla),e1 011 le,f111X %vitt serve points 1 & 2. h.s partner 5 & (, On le tin B. thesame player serves port's 3 & and his partner. porno. 7. is & 9 II In regu:ar play, a match may he either 2sets of sets %%Oh the 5 out ''I "-point tiehreA, to decide the%inner ti sets are divided. NT the izgular 2 out ail1. or out of S set maid) torinuta m.1), he used

NO HTH A

TIE BRE AK DIAGRAM

iftwri az 4 4,Bhos the rapt 10 serve the 9th POlnt elther right or left

A -- SOUTH SOUri-i

hgureI

100 DGWS TENNIS-BADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE Handicap Rules 11,,}shall proLeed as itthe points of the handKap had actually been playedI samples (a) Ilan,likap 2 p miltsServer ColIffnent,es serving point 3 into right or forehand court. Sery Res aid side both changealter 3 points

(b) flandKap 6 pointsServes k,onimences serving point 7 into the left or backhand courtService changes after 4 points (6+4=1))) Side shall change after 9 points (649=151. "I he giver ()t the handicap shall have the dicuce ofservice and side iltthe ()puling; set, choice of serviceoily in suh.,equtt set,. At the comlusion of each set planers shall not change sides.( N-S),10 estimate handicap points to be received at 30-30 in 9-point ticheat for 1-3 points there will be no points handicap, 4-- points1-pour handicap,)--14points2-point handicap.15-21 points3-point ha'', .cap, 22-30 point, 4-point handicap. In the 9-point tiebreak handicap points shall be consideredas it already playedI- xamples (a) 1-point handicap. A shall serve point 2 Into the tell or 11,0,11,111a court, 11)) 2-point handn.ap. B shall serve point 3 into the right or to:-ehand court (See Diagram)

Rules of 'ASSS "No-Ada I. SLIA rides apply eve ept In scoring)

1 1 he advantage pond is dimmated in the game, and the advantage game in the set 2 'Hie first to win 4 points, I, 2, 3, 4, (not 15. 30, 4(1),wins the game, the last to win 6 games wins the set. (See Rules 9, 10, and Tiebreak Diagram )It must he emphasued that no-ad does not have the handKap advantage of "31 point

VASSS Rules for Scoring Round Robin Medal Play (RRMP) A "round may be any multiple of 20 (40-60S0) total pointsor one 31-point set. II a 31-point set Is used, the winner shall receive 5-point bonus lot the win, plus the unplayed points in the 'el. (e.g. A wins 31-10, his score will be 31+5+20=56 points), ServiLe and sides are changed as in 31 -noel. See Rules 2, 3, 4. 5 Individual handicaps are estimated against scratch for the numbei of points in a round as decided by the tournament committee. 'tournamentl cam handicap is the sum of the individual play cis' handKaps, In ,:ase of a tie, see Rule 9 and 10, and follow "I iebreak Diagram

USLTA TOURNAMENT REGULATIONS 101 "TIE-BREAK" PROCEDURES FOR TENNIS

Authorized for 1971 LIMA Sanctioned Tournaments at 6 Games All

Permission to; sand,,,ncd,Aumainents death -0,hich- tie-Neaking plc),vtim,* d in tlli Lnammoos pas,age bN the St I I ( oimmticeSepi.inhcr Pt resolution "ti proposed the 'special( 11111111 on ),..(pTing and I'l.i>illgRulestd subinumitee oftheI ong Range Planim,g ("t intuit I he itsointion outlintd specilic procedure to he usekiatter wall and said the p:oc:dure he usedat the (Twit tit the tournament committce either throughout thetournament ,r eSent or in designated round or rounds, %Antistn, ii natches to be consulerecl, tor ranking purposes.as has mg etillal inCt It utih mat, hes not utiliiing the licbrcalsing procedure,1 has rrokisnin is that reasonable noticeshallbeallord.-d Pr otIVthe commencement of ,ornpetirin I in, departure hom ,omentio-alscoring ,N perussice,n iti IIII I hespecitted(and onl authot tied tie-hreakmethods are A-out-or-0 points and --ont-ord 2points 5 out of 9 Points Stin:,(% It (It. Pla et Vs turn to serce the 1;thgame tat he shall selse Points1 and 2 dght c.itni and ictt courtPtalet 13 then serws Points 3 and 4 and lt. PlaNers then iange sides. and serce, Points ", and o, B Point II the score leaches 4 pmil. all, Pla,1,,ei13 scrl.es Point limn the right or lett ,ourt at the electitm of the It:«11.e! I he set shall be lc d as games to ('the trehreal, counts as ohe game m icc honing ballchanges Pla:er 13 shall Noce firstin the set tolloccing the plating of the Ile-bleak films assuring that he Rill be firstser WI it this set also goes into a tie-break) f he filaers shall "star tor one- alter Ile -break II both the lirst hco sets tvbestotthrce set match or it eithet 1550 or tom sets in a best -d)1,114Cset match end in tie-break games the liWeis shall spill a Nikkei at thestart of the final set 10 establish serisC order and side ((implies should note that, itties results in a change in sercing sequence. the 00,1 ball (11.011".C. It .u)}, should he deterredone game to preseue the alternation (ittile imhi Io serce first krill nets halls I n('u/i/ec 171 1)(111bles the same 1(011..11 . m singles appliCS provided that each plo,e1 shallserse hour I he same end of the court 102 DOWS TENNIS - BADMINTON- SQUASH GUIDE in the lie-break pink that he has serAtti fioiii during that part;) set 1 I sequen,e 101 1),111-Llidnve re, honing

7 out of 12 Points I" \hot! and tivh tow i and tiff wto' B 1%es Pmni, ,and s) \ es Points and 6I he platts taint (Il inge sides. 13 series Points and setts Points') andU. It setts Points II and I'It ettliti pi,iyti )tispoints, the t r.it toided games to 6itthestore ofiiic game if a..hes 6 po titsall the players shill dhiljgC side, stud play shall tonimutStithsett(' ,dteinating on eery point until one playti estaldishes a margin of points as !allows ;111 point I right tour( 1, 13 series Point 14 (right) )\ sertts Pont I5 IOU I3 sets.. Point16 (lett)IIthe stole is .1:11 tied thep1,0etsJiang):sidesetert I points and lept atthis [toted:1R" Phi!, elIssit,ill seise firstin the set follotting the playing of the he plaers shill 'slat for one It both the tirst ttto se()) in a best-c-thiee set matt)) of ii either 1v))) of lourits in a matth end in tie-break gains tiltpla), CI, shill spun a rd,het at the stall id the final set to (. s(aldish .miff order and site /)ribli k , Iaqi /1 ii,u) ( am/ D Assuming that Pla I) has seised tiltI _'lit edttle to nuke the .),ore 6 games allIht teams ship

slat- to! the Id.: 2". point. of the hebleak. then thingsides and hangs ctert,4 points !heredity' (luring the first I p011115 A shall serc Points! And 2, right tom! and lett fowl, thange sides, (set \ es Points; and If series Pointsand 6 t hange sidesI) series Porn!. - and' seises Points') drid 10, Jiang, sides. sines PointsI findi 2It ctihr team points, the set is refolded games 60 (, Ifthe stole of the tie-bleak game teat lies 6 pointsall.If shall sere Point twin the light omit, thange sides, I) selves Point i-1 horn the tight total, ,\ 'cites Point1 S (roil the lett Low t. slidnIte sides(sitter Point 16 limn the left omit. B sites Point 17 from the tight smut, dianga sides, efteft t pot son victim) of the tie hied], game the teams shall -stay tin one and either (or 1) members of the team who .raid the last full game thsloie the tie-bleak) shall serve the lust gone of the nest set, II ho'h the fist Iwo sets to a hest-ollnee set match or it eithei two of loin sits ul a best-o1-11%.t." set end in tie -Meal, games, the player, shall spin d 1.1k.elit of the final set 10 establish sett It: olds!! and side

"TIEBREAK" PROCEDURES FOR TENNIS 103 ! he tie-break counts as one game in reckoning balancechanges I he Speualonmuttee to Its lesolimon mentioned not only the need tm "reasonable limitations on the length of matchesas a key condition oftelc\ision sponsorship, butalso "the interest and Loncemethc otpay mg spectator,thendesireto rdy on the scheduling of matches imoking different players, and theirLonumi- ments elsewher"." Italso pointed out thates en "local touinaments generall), imohe evening play, with limited time available for matchcompie- non. It said use ot this method would "not material!). interteie %kith the stragetical Or mental outlook of theplayers, and retention ot traditional scoring through 6-gamesall assures reasonabletesting of endurance and fitness Vithout undue burdenon spectators of telesismn plograinnung The ''endless set." said the Committee, "Is consideiedthe most urgent of the playing mules ,/roblem areas, and One that might sokt d %%itli a11)1111111UMof departure limn conventional scoi mg

104 DGWS TENNIS-BADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE Officiating Services Area

()S 1'011 ( ,41 wit; S(121«'1 1 UV I111, arealOne 01't.*.C11in the 1)(;11 S Aru...tute n do,oted to the Mauling and rating LAN It, 1cutt,e 130,ird, %%110) meets annuall pilot to the\I1!'1 R national tomention I, 10111pu,C(1 01 c hde, man, \ a /kw war-2 12 1, anda/',1( 2 /u'f '0 1' I it, khan I, Cie, [ell!II an Oren Meeting dt the nd'i,/;)%11 (III (On 2 1 c((letattv,ho rat ,aid, to board, and re, elv, appli2it tons 101 nel% hoards She is 11% (Cli1.!111.111 bollIl alternateeath!, the lot.11 hoard, at ott11LA, astir( t, \,h0 i, te.pomable ior ho,,/,1 duestilt also iselet. led 1)111,211 ballotIn allerudteeji, Ilki(41,11 boast!, ot t Ilab, p aIot(1 !ph a,I1 e, 11,;q11(of( )1't( id mi.!' In 1 ontinittec ith 111t,,IN used ht retelee, unip21 a/ d to 01121 tate pint." .nd mat,. hesI he l' & I01 Odtairinaa t, 1 01.1 MI INNelek It d 1-)).theI \ tItV,C 130,11(1 ,,,f,,,,,mintltce 111 e,t,11 ,putt I, teTk)11stbie 101 AndI e',1,1!,12 111101 tik 1,111/1" t (.A111(1110,,,Indtot1' ;1112)1v the I Ct. h MO ( )1 1 It. 1,11 ing .15 le pl11)101ed m 11N tt,pel tIi ,p(lj vmh1/41,11 p h b, ;pp, intinentIt ou 11.:1 1' k on, erning the te2Intiqus ot 01 It, latim), I'' the applopliate I ,21 O 1 11,11/11121 kammatt,,n, 4e rid Rat', Ilictc IN an I R f ontinit tee tor eat!catthe nine ,poll, in hill)1,11011.N ate giwt I ,R L 11,11r It andhetcommitteeateI esponsible 101 ptepaimr .111,1 ring the of ill.iallnII theoletiL c% animation. 111' genetal .11.11111,1'1,111(1 51 l.1,101 11.1 110 R lite 1tk. 1Z 112.11111,11 -1 tel t/lll,l1(1/11,1kt ill. 111111 11 1V1/4'N and t+mplie the genetal material lot the sports paLkets1 he 1h,ul !MinofI R an ,ippotitte(1 menthol 01 the OS I Mt% e 130,1tdIt too need intormation ieltat(lingtill' studquestions (11the Guides 02 a quest Ion In the V.1111111.11 1011,V, 111C10 the .11)1)10111 !MC I 1t. R l.11411 man I A i> ((1110,1(11 wo hil111, 4111111% I hisontin 11 tee is tesponsil)le tor edning the OS poi non ofthe (''ode'I he(. !Littmanis appointed tot a t. \0 -}eau tetm 01 (atille and is a menthe, of the I \ Ck11110' 130.Nd 1)()C (1)11 it, t ()flu rating ( (),))41Itzatm II here is one DO(' Ill C.1111 (21 the NI% dist! 1( is of,\ \HIT R She ,else, as liaison betveen ;h boalds of ottb.2,11, In het t!t,trltt and the OS\ I \e(titRe 130,11 d

OFFICIATING SERVICES AREA 105 lilt DO(I\ clek ted ather AA/ R dtstrict convention and senes on I he I xe.utnre Board andProtvona IBoards. of Women Boa rds 1JJt:iatcj of 01/n wIsi!hese boards are made up of orgam/cd groups v.omen throughout the UnitedStates who are allthOnled to gie rating, A listing ot these boardsfollovo,

106 DGWS TENNISBADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE OFFICIATING EXECUTIVE BOARD 1972.1973 !I cqFJ('01313, North re \as State Unp.Denton 76203

t( NI( ( HARI ()1 11 111 , Southern Illinois lini% bondale 62901 (1972-731 Car- hairman-t lc( tVARY ROI AND GRII-1 IN,Winthrop( allege Rods 11th, S C. 29730 I1 0-3--41 $ec/eta/1NIRGINIA HUN ,('allege at \ 44(5)1 kiater, Ohio //court r .\'N ROW1.ANDS. 215 I Isidore St,. ('oncord, Nlass 01742 (1 969 - ) Chairmen of Standing Committees tph, /,,

PA 1 R k1A DUNCAN, ChatrminFt11a} es State College, 1 11.1} es Kans n7601 BadmmteniJFAN PANKONIN, Illinois State Unix,, Normal 61761 ButAcibuti SIIIRLFY 0313 W mbourne Rd , Burke, Va 22015 (,) mnasnecKITTY KJ' 1 DS' N, Unix, of Massachusetts, Amherst 01003 SoftballELM!. WULF, I ranklin Township Junto! High School, Wananyiker, Ind. 46230 Su onnung CAROL COOPER, Southern Illinois Unix , Carbondale 62001 Synchromzed MARY KAZI USK 1 ,MtDoh. oke (ol- le South iladley, Mass 01075 Tem.o ANNE PITTMAN, Arizona State Unix,, lempe 85281 Track and FieldBONNII P Uno:ofMinnesot., Minneaohs 55.155 Voile% ball KAY CORCORAN, College ot MtSt. Joseph Mt St Josedh, Ohio 45051

EXAMiNATIONS AND RATINGS COMMITTEE CAROL SWIM, ( 'woman, Beinidu State College, Bemidn, Minn 56601 Soobaii LORI NI RAMSFY, Illuwrs ( mita! College. Doksen 11,111, Fast Peoria 61611 Swimming, CAROL COOPF R, Southern Illinois Unix , Carbondale 62001 SynOnonized Swimming Co-chau men1111 RI SA ('AN1)1 RSON, 2100FortiethSt., De,-,Momes, Iowa 50310, and JAN11 MOLDFNIIAUFR, WISC0111111 State Univ , Oshkosh 54001 Truck and Field KATHRYN RUSS, I (Inn, ot Artrotht, 85721 Volleyball NANCY S1 UBBS, Unto01I ennessee, Knoxville 37016 Associate NANCY LAY. Limy of Tennessee, Kno\ulie 37016 JACKII' SIIICK,AssueurteChairman Ulm otMinnesota, %lineal), 'is 55455 108 DGWS TENNISBADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE UM/ BadmintonJI ANFT W11 SIR, Sam Houston State Um\ , [lulus- s fexas 77340 /3(°Ai /ball RI rA sm1111,9873 McBioom StSunland, Calif 91040 Assoc/ateFLORA BRUSSA, Fast Los Angeles College, Los Angeles 00022 Gimnastus\FARINA FRENCH, Rte.I, Box 245, Foiest Grove, Ow. 97110 I ssocia te11FLEN TIMM b RNIANS Um\01 South Carolina. Columbia 29208 7ennle CLAUDIA GIACOMINI, quota High School, Redwood Cit!.Calif. 90263 TENNIS PRINCIPLES AND TECHNIQUES OF OFFICIATING COMMITTEE A NNI. Chairman, Arizona State Univ Tempe 85281 MARY LOU CRANE. 8413 1,. barll, Scottsdale, Ariz. 85251. CA FIII RI NI'WII KINSON, 92 W. Lynwood StPhoenix, Ariz 85003. TENNIS EXAMINATIONS AND RATINGS COMMITTEE CL AUDIAGI ACOMINI Chau man Sequoia High School, Redwood City, Calif 90263. CAROL COLL, Capuchino High School, San Bruno, ('alit 94066. CA nib GREbN, Univ. of Washington, Seattle, Wash 98122 A NOR Ii NisiSbN, Carleton College, Nol thfield, Minn. 55057 PHYLLis noRowar. uson high School, Long Beach, Calif. 90801 CURLY NI AL, Stanford Univ., Stanford, Cain 94305.

BADMINTON PRINCIPLES AND TECHNIQUES OF OFFICIATING COMMITTEE JEAN PANKONIN, Chairman. Illinois State Univ., Normal 01761 S rrylir NS, Wisconsin State LimyLa Crosse 54001 MYRNA sTEPHLNs, Wisconsin State Univ., La Crosse 54601 BADMINTON EXAMINATIONS AND RATINGS COMMITTEE JEANETTI. WIFSER, Chairman, Sam Houston State UnivHunts- ville, Tex ,77340 131 TT ALbXANDF R, Sam Houston State Univ, Huntsville, Tex 77340 MAR'I'IIA IlAW rum:N:1 Um \of Houston 77340 IUNFBURKJ, Texas limy Austin 78712 PA I S(41IM IT l', Del Mar College, Cot pus Christi 78404 ABBH RtrrunGr Rustic Knolls, IlackettstoiAn, N J. 07840

OFFICIATII4G EXECUTIVE BOARD 109 96 DGWs TENNIS-BADMINTON SQUASH GUIDE

AFFILIATED BOARDS OF OFFICIALS 1972.1973 ach board listed below offers ratings as indicated Affiliated boards may have rated officials at each grade level from National ofticial to intlainural officialProvisional boards may have rated officials atthe Associate and Intramural grade levels. they are indicated below by anasterisk(4).Upon request.the board chairman can su;'plyalistotnames, addresses, and telephone numbers cI these officials Where itis indicated that the annual report was not teemed. the xammations andRatings chairmanwill not send the current eammation packet to the board chairman until she receives this annual report. For lists ofboard-given ratings. consult the appropnate Gurdev "I he lltz.si.etball Guide lists all boards which give ratings in any sport

CENTRAL DISTRICT Dist, icIO I:cuffing Com dina to,Wanda Green, limy, of Northern Iowa, Cedar Falls. Iowa 50613 (1972-741

EASTERN DISTRICT

UrstrutOff ewInig Comdinatcn Fdith Cobane, State limy of New Yolk, Albany, N Y 12203 (1971-73)

MIDWEST DISTRICT !)mire t Off zczating C'ooldinatcoPat Roy , 8 12 Circle To xei. Indianapolis, Ind. 46204

ILLINOIS Central Illinois Board of Women Officials Chairman Barbara Co t hem, Searle Dr , Normal 61701 Badminton Chairman Vivk n Kuszek. Illinois State Univ., Normal 61701 Ratings givenin badminton, basketball, gymnastics, softball. volleyball.

OHIO Northwestern Ohio Bowling Green Board of Women Officials Chan man Sue I lager, 131 Slate St , Bowling Green 43402. 110 DGWS TENNIS-BADMINTON-SQUASH GUIDE 'A mos Chao-ownAgnes Hooky. Boss hill; Green G,,:en 43403 UlmI3owling Ratings given In Ivasketball,tennis, volleyball

WEST VIRGINIA Southeastern West Virginia Board ofWomen Officials Chao own Georgia Swan,209-1/2 Vc -million, Athens :4712. Isailoonton Chao own GeorgiaSwan (same as above) Ratings given in badminton, track& field, volleyball,

WISCONSIN La Crosse Po:1:d of WomenOfficials Chuirme9r. cc Stephenson, WHOA llall,Wisconsin State Univ., laCIONSC54601. Bathmwon Chen man leeStephenson (same as above) Ratings given in badminton, basketball, g} mnastics,swimming, s nshromied svvimming. track &field, volleyball

NORTHWEST DISTRICT Distric t Qt/owl:us; CoordinatorJan Boyungs, Central Washington. I llensburg,Wash 98926 (1970-73) I:leo Jean Neely, Pastern OregonCollege, La Grande, Ore 97850 (1973-75)

OREGON Northern Oregon Board ofWomen Officials Cfurnmarr Fran Gannon, Madison11.S., Portland 97207. /e/o9v Charrman JoAnne Batt, 97207 2744 N.I.32nd Place, Portland Ratings given in basketball. & field, volleyball gymnastics, swimming, tennis. tiack

SOUTHERN DISTRICT Dist, t OE:tufting Cmo doom), AileenBritton, dward White Senior High School, Jacksonville, Fla 33210 (1972-74) AFFILIATED BOARDS OF OFFICIALS ALABAMA Auburn Uniersity Board of WomenOfficials Cha nu nNatlellell Lane, Nlemonal ( ohseum, Auburn Ulm, ,10)orn 36830 Fermi, t hcrnvr VinellenLane (same as above) , all. tennis, volleyball

ARKANSAS Arkansasoard of Women Officials Chair non Pat rdon, Arkansas Poi} technic College, 72X01 Russellville 'Fenno han man BettySNNIII,StateCollege ot Coimay 2032 Arkansas, Ratings go,en m tennis, volleyball.

GEORGIA Milledgeville Board of Women Officials Chairman Jean Osborne, Georgia College, Milledgoille31001 Chairma tJean Osborne (sameasatone), I en no ChairmanJean Osborne (same as abose Ratings given in tennis, volleyball

MISSISSIPPI North Mississippi Board of WomenOfficials Chau man.JillUpton, Mssissippi State College Columbus 39701 for Women. TennisChairman Barbara Garrett, Mississippi StateCollege for Women, Columbus 39701. Rating,, giveninbasketball, gymnastics, softball,* tennis, volleyball. swimming,

NORTH CAROLINA West Central North Carolina Board of WomenOfficials ChairmanPat lhelscher, Univ. of Noitli Carolinaat Greensboro Greensboro 27412. Chatrman-c(ect Pat !heist her (sa:eas a tun e). Tennic ChairmanDorothy Davis, Univ, of NoithCarolina at Greensboro, Grec mho! o 27212 Ratings given in basketball, tennis, volleyball 112 DGWS TENNISBADMINTONSQUASHGUIDE OKLAHOMA Oklahoma Board of Women Officials

( 1141111'1a 17 Pat Wathen, Harding .111, Oklahoma Cit3, 73 118 Chan man-eh ( t Bad rn,n ton Clwn man Berneice Wagoner. Central State College, 1 dmond 73034 I emu% ChairmanJune 1 reps, Central State College,I dmond 73014. Ratings given in badminton, basketball, tennis. %alley ball TEXAS Central Texas Board of Women Officials Chair manMartha %ru, Women's (;, VIM of 1 eits,.lustln 78712 Badminton( ha trmanDeanna Ponnuerenk,t,invoflexas, Austin 78712. Tt MILS Chnrman Dorothy Lovett, l'inv 01 'I exas, Austin 78712 Ratings given in badminton, basketball, swimming, tennis,

Denton County Board of Women Officials Chan man Jean Pekara, North 'texas State link, , Denton 76203 C !Human-deo BetsyI andy. exas Women's Ulm., Denton 76204, Badminton Cha omit!Virginia Hicks, 1 exas Women's Univ Denton 76204. 7 emus Chairman KatherineMagee,I exas W omen's1.1m1, Denton 76204. Ratings given in badminton, basketball, tennis, volleyball Houston Board of Women Officials C halt man. Martha I Sebern, 79 26th Pella Dr., Houston, x. 77036 Thrum Chau man "I !tidyKing, 6810 Westoser :17Houston 77017 Ratings given in swimming, tennis, volleyball Southeast Texas Board of Officials C/tauman, Jeanette Wilser, Sam Houston State Univ , Huntsville 77340 Badminton Chairman. Jeanette Wilser (smile as above). Tennis Chairman Jeanette Wilser (same as above) Ratings given in badminton, basketball, tennis, volleyball.

AFFILIATED BOARDS OF OFFICIALS 113 Southern I e as Board of Soaten Officials

hannhin 13e11 JeanBr(' \+ cr. 4109 \nen Dr. IslligN\ Ilk M363 Iwits Chuiiman Smith,S32 West ice. Kingsille -S363 Ratings green in basketball, tennis, \ olle)hall West leas Board of Women Officials ( hatuizan R Jeannine \k I lane) I v \asI riftt n, .I libbo,k -940o Badvirtitoti ( hao-,nattBetts Iesn, I h Ohm. k 70409 1", utrt( /Human1 mita /sit/millet, I LAX, el. III nis . bin -9-109 Ratings gi:ii in badminton*. basketball,tennis, volle) ball

SOUTHWEST DISTRICT /),\//r,/ (), 11( la ( tun ,1 MI ern (;ardner, 1 tab State I.;\I °gall, l tab S312 ARIZONA Central Ariiona Board of Women Officials (lianniatiDorotb) Naples, PboeniN, College, 1202 W.l'honms. Phoenixc020 Badminton (huntnan Merle Pasta, Aniona State t its , I vmpc 281 Ratings giveninbad min t 011,basket hall,softball.s'%% im ming aolles Wit

Southern Ancona Desert Board of Women Officials Chan man Jean %%Ate, Cholla II S2001 W 22nd, mson X5-'05 ladonn bin Chan man Peg* St egei, Palo Veide II S , I ;02 S Awnida Vega. I ueson 10. Ratings green in badminton, basketball. sot ban,one) ban CALIFORNIA San Joaquin Board of Women Officials Chan man Diana Poly .735I ;ist Noble. WI2, \ ;NAL, 032" "I emus( hall own BarbaiaANIL!,3,)3}i I 0+705 Iedora. bicsno Ratings green in basketball. g) unlashes,lentils, \ one) hall

114 DGWS TENNISBADNIINTON-SQUASH GUIDE STANDARDS FOR OFFICIALSRATINGS Badminton, Basketball, Softball, SWII11{1111111, Tennis, track-Field, and ball Volley I here are Inc of 1 iciak tongs I aci, : V.110115 meet the needs IL".els of mutts eVenkAlta to%a ululate intere,t individuals who desireto of t [cute All ratings,e oistetable, none is a prer....quisite to any otherrating I he IntramuralWiwi (111.1111111 the holder to the St 11001 in which she ottic Lac game, in is enrolled 'tt rank'', of komparJhleleel the istu,rue latuitfqualities the holder to may be adequately controlled by officiate gams..., which I he ma! name a le-sei experienced the typical uller,choolor,ienokl Mat the 1101.-kfIS k. apaNe 01 (III It IA Mr, lek.redilonal he //,,,,,tra/ k' ge,oe tanng denotes atleast ten eat s.etske National ,t I ic :al andrepresents maturity and I he IV"IlOndi espelience 141111a! signifiesthat of in iating any game the holderis,,apahfc-of anywhere in the Unlit this tat mg is for the most highly skilledot tura' Specific requirementsfor all rating, Ali outlined belosx Intramural Official

grades theory, 70, piactical. 70 2 1 heoretikalexamindtion al11111a110I101 national examinationminnroim 70 3Practical examination 1. Age no requirementsati,factorilY -ailingone contest 5 Duration1%%0 sears it nn nest June 6, Recommended leesminimal lees .1, establymed t ration, if c/c. stied by the Associate Off'zial 1. Minimum grade,average 10 theory and practical. 75 2 Theoretwal examination 3 national examination,1111,111MM! 74. Practical examinationgreen by at least one National of minimum 75. nem!. 4. Age no tequtmetnent 5. 1)mation twoyear, from next June 1 6 Recommended leesmaximum 55 plus traeling, a single game match, or meet expense, tot

'Now. 'I hew fees are recommendedby the 1 x etutis e hoard Affiliated Boards as .1 guide to I hese boards may set feeshisser or higher 01.111 those suggested above when the lotal situation demands MI adjustment recommended fees from the

STANDARDS FOR OFFICIALSRATINGS 115

beginner should protect 'heshuttlecock to a minimum high test at a distance of 14 point of feel twin the netI he shuttlecock should then drop Deal thebaseline of the opponents peitormance. a 'lung cowl10 Medstite may he stietched ac toss thecourts 14 feet from the net and parallelto it at a height of 15 tent from the hoot, o esecute an over head electa player must hit a falling shuttlecock to standardhle thesituation so the pertormeis liesimilarin nature, students hale set -tips which setting up should he requitedto protect the shuttlecockto a spectated height at trom thenet a specified distance I hese requitement.may ary according to the students' le el1 or beginner. the requirement tot the set-up might he 11 heel highat a distance of 8 feet from an adequate set up, the net "10 insure .1 second stung may be Limits to meet the s II, stietc bed across the Local Official

I Minimum grades avelage of thew), and practical, 80 2 I heoretical eummation national eXa111111a110,11, minimum 7 R VtadR. al examination given byatleast two member, with National ',dings, numnium 80. 4 Age no requirement 5 Duration two years from next June 1 0. ReLommended fees $.,7 plus traveling expenses 1or a single gaine. match. oi meet *

Junior National Official

I Age below20years At 20 Yeats,rating automatically becomes a National rating. 2 I or other rquiiments set ,c'arzona/ OM( rill helms

National Official , Minimum grades acerage 01 them yand practical. 85 -I heoretkal cumulationnational exammatwn, minimum 82 Practical examination, a l 0.111.,11 examinationgreen by at least three members with National ratings, minimum 8S h Alternate plan lot basketball or volleyball (second yea' of akin holding a National rating with the same board for tour consecutive yea's, the offk 1.11 may request that seven dill erentcoacheses aluate herol iciat mgI see appropriatesports packetslotdetails) inlieuof the piact teal rating session. 4 Age numuutm 20 years by June 1of the year rating is taken 5 Duration two years iron next June I 6 Recommended feesS9 plus traveling expenses for a single game, match, or meetIt only one crucial is uscd, the fee should he SI8 plus trawling expenses for a single gam.*

National Honorary Rating t.An applicantiselunbletoapply after earning her fz1 consetunretotingt.ttiso-i eatinterrals.The application site oldbe made to the past chairman of the Offmating Services Area by the affiliated board chairman and should be in th:c hands of the past chairman by March I. ?. Alternate lequirement when a Lq,se of one yea' has occurred in the holding of a N itional rating, twelve years of service as a ,z 7 ,Imustics Guide for information about judges' ratings in gyttlitaStleS ext.CpriOnS

z DGWS T7NNISBADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE National or Junior National Official are requiredI his would tie a span of 13 years. Apply after earning the sixth rating. Duration as Fong astheofficialremains active (actively off games, training officials, or acting as a rater for an affiliated board)For reinstatement after being mactike more than one year, the official must pass the national theoretical examinant,' %kith a minimum score of $0. Levels of ratings for gymnastics and are: 11 inimums (;171111UCIUS Theoretical Prac wal National 90 50 Regional.. RO 65 t o t at 70 50 11,nunumN SIno honu eel Swunthing rho ,)rencal Pru,tteul National. 90 55 Regional . 75 Ioral. . 70 65

Ft E EXCEPTIONS SwimmingIlse iekommended lees for Nationally rand skkunnung oftkials aie When there are three off 11411`.So plus nakelme expenses per oftioal for a single meet (kkhether dual or gioupI. St) plus trawling expenses per for meets with first and would teams partkipanng W here there are fewer than idree oft-matsS9 plus travding expenses per officwl for a single m .et (whether dual or group), S12 plus traveling epet e'Cr ott k 'al for meets with first and second teams partk Iran 'TennisIn komphame wit t United States Lawn I emus , to non polity, no fees will.c charged lot officiating tennis matcncs, although navel expenses Jceepted Track and held.Itist.akt unaryfor one ()limal to be paid a ininlintlin of S9 pet session session shall be del met( as a pet nod oftime approximatelythree hours ntleagth) plus traveling expenses In the Lase of shorter Ses.ions, ft es should he adjusted ittordingly When possible, other officials may be paid

REGISTRATION OF OFFICIALS A number of states require those who of ficiate either boys or girls intas(holastiL «intests to be registered with the State Iugh School

STANDARDS FOR OFFICIALS RATINGS 117 Athletic Association or other admunstratne bodyHolding a D(;W S rating ordinarily does not exempt an official frontcomplying wiut this regulation All DGWS ofticials ssho ()Dictateany high school or mmor high are urged to cooperate fullywith their state regulatory body by registering with theproper organization and pay ing any required tee, by wearing the official emblemin addition to the DGWS emblem, and by complying with allrequirements for sports of ficials. AMATEUR STANDING DF OFFICIALSt An official who sashes to maintain heramateur status as a patticipantin a sport must be awate of the rulinos)on amateur status established by the governing body for thatsport Amateur status may be defined bygroups governing high school andcollegelevel competition. Nationalorganizations governing amateur competition mayalso have establishedrulings on the amateur status of the participant the official who wishes to maintain herstatus as a participant is responsible for investigating the specificreg.:damns of the governing body who has Jurisdiction over tier eligibilityas a participant. Amateur Standing in Basketball, Track and Field, andSumming According to the ,Inch has tunsdict ion over amateur basketball, track and field, andsw miming, any person receiving compensation for officiating inany sport renders herself Ineligible for further amateur competition An official, without Jeopardizing heramateur standing, may request, receive, or accept expenses in connection withher participa- tion in any event which shall not exceed (a) heractual expenditures for travel (eight cents per mileor first class public transportation tare) and (b) her actual expendituresto' maintenance Lip to a nomtennzed total of SIO per day Amateur Standing in Softball The Amateur Softball Association has taken theposition that umpires who officiate softball games and are paid for theirservices do notprofessionalize themselves and aretherebyeligibleto participate in ASA competition Amateur Standing in Volleyball According to the tinned States VolleyballAssociation, volleyball officials may get only transportation, meals,and lodging and may receive no honorarium if they wish to retain theiramateur standing For more complete details, cee JOHN /1 19 24-27, October 19(03 118 OGWS TENNISBAOMINTONSQUASH GUIDE A 4" ,

HOW TO BECOME A RATED OFFICIAL.

! Stud} the rules. the altkle or the techindues of ottitiating and the stud} questions 2 \ ttendinterpretationsmeetings andoffklating dunks or t raining .0411ses c Ofhith ted 0,11\i ruty 32ra.titeI often some, olf mating tomes east',}1,, others rt tomes onlyas thele`,11110111,11.(1 \101k and torhentration ll.olne k1111.1qn .111(1V01k hard to impro% 4 IIndout from the chairman of the nearest affiliated board v\ hen e\ammations for ratings are to he heldi( onsult list of af !Mated boards (uad the chairman ofthe nearestaffiliated board for materials ties essar to pre Intramural ratings Remember that itis the aunt of the Of fit rating Seri.es Area to maintain a high standard for National of no not be distomaged iton do not retme a National rating onout lustatt..mpt\\eltoesuggestionstroutthet \armfuls. pia.tite more, and try again INFORMATION FOR AFFILIATED AND PROVISIONAL BOARDS Anailthar«t hoard isa board +Ark h has at least three National of lab, in a given sportit is maim-lied to gn,e ratings at all le\ els in that stunt \ promo/011a; board is a board \\ Ina has at least three Asso.iatt. of trualsin .1 given sport I is authorwed to gr \e ratings atthe Intramural and A ssok. hitt le\ :is 111 that sport 11. hen OSA ratingfilm, are used MC.1111111for rating in }naromted sv.imming g}mnastit s, these boards ma} mard ratingsatan level and do not need three National three Assottate oitmak An affiliated boat.' v.ludi finds it cannot IOW the 1C10111eIlle1IN for retailing full affiliati,m ma} request permission from the OS Lhanman to become a p 0\ isional board. ,An affiliated boar I ma} request piosisional stain- n, sports in vluch it has le\ler than 1hice National officials, Mule retaining full affiliated status m sports In it has three National officials Boards giving g} mnastits and or synduomted s\viinnum, ratings have altilialed status in those sports Boards are urged to promote the rat mg of Intramural officials FS supplying examinations and pia..11.al rating forms to teachers in nearby ....hoofs bees 10 toyer operating e\penses 111,1y be chargedto the candidates for these servites Retold, of all ratings must he kept by the hoards Please winetoth((Obviating Stmtes Areaset. TC1,1[.for assistant.: in the org,.mtat ion ofIRAs..1,oup., desumr to become affiliated or provisional boards

STANDARDS FOR OFFICIALS RA' ING' 119

1 6 Badminton, Gymn,stics,1Softball, Swimming, Synchronized Swimming,) Tennis, and Track and Field Ratings A hoard does not need to !lace a specific number of officials in order to inmate ratings in these sports b \animations %%ill be sent to the board chairman when she makes application to the Lhairman of the1 \animations and Ratings Committee o! Oltsport in which rattat:s 00 to b, Vtininat 10i1P.11 he( saremailed acl circlingto the following schedule Septemb r 1 S badminton, basketball. swimming, synchro- n./.. miming. tennis. and colle, hail k hen rat, 'din booking has been confirmed- pinnastics No% embe: IStrack and field Januar I5softball ('house ai least three of the best qualified indiciduals to act as the examining commatce tor the sport. (After two years, if a hoard wishes to continue at filiation in a sport, it will be required to ha% e at least three \diurnal officials in the particular sport.) Basketball and Volleyball Ratings I o initiate ratings in basketball, m aftihated board must !lace three National officials, and a provisional hoard must base three of floats with at least ,111 AsSoL idle rating o Initiate ratings in volley ball, an allihated ;ward must!lace one National official, and a pioisional hoard must hove one ofttet,tl with at least an Associate rating, Emblem and Uniform I he emblem for National of ficials in all sports consists of a shield Other emblems are acadable tot Local, Associate, and Intramural officials. the otticial uniform for basketball, volleyball, and track and field is a navy and white tailored shirt or navy blue and white jersey worn with either a navy blue ladoted skirt, culotte, or kilt, and appropriate rubbei-soled shoes, and socks. A navy blue Mater may complete the undorm if desired ()litchi's who receivefees tot officiating are required to wear the official shirt 1 he official shut and white stunts of tailored skirt constitute Ow uniliam tot National swimming officials rho ofthial shirt and !lacy blue or white tailored skirt constitute the unitolin tot National tennis officials I or softball, the umpires shall wear 1/11110111)S which are nacy, blue in color.

Sec respCk for rating prokedures,,

120 OGWS TENNIS-BADMINTON-SQUASH GUIDE

..0 The official shirts and emblems are available front The !fano Id Company, Sebago Lake,Maine 04075.Lire company can also provide approved blazers When ordering, stind dresssize and check or money order for correct amount Anyone may order the official shirt. A current rating card must accompany an indis 'dual's order for an emblem, however, itis not necessary to send a rating card when ordering a shirt. An affiliated board may wish to have a supply of shirtsor emblems for distribution to newly rated officials A quantity order may he placed war by the affiliated board chairman. Itis not necessary that the chairman enclose her own rating card, but full payment roust accompany the order. Prices Shirt $5.50, knit jersey with zipper neck, S8 50, knit jersey with button neck. S12.00, doeskin blazer, 528.00, National and Junior National emblems, $1.75; Local, Associate, and Intra- mural emblems, $1. Shipping Charge754' per order.

HOW TO ESTABLISH A BOARO OF OFFICIALS I Fstablish the need for an affiliated board I y contactingwomen in the area who have current ratings or are interested in standardizing and raising the level of officiating badminton, basketball, gymnastics, softball, swimming, tennis, track and field, or volleyball in that area. 2 Write to the Officiating Services Area ,,,,cretary, listedin the Officiating Services Area section ort1.sGuide, for a sample copy of an authorized constitution for officials' boards and the Policies and Practices Handbook and application for beet;ling an affiliated board, 3At a designated meeting of interested women, present plans for forming a board a Choose a name which will permit expansion of functionas need may arise; do not limit title to one sport b. From the group, electa chairman, chairman-elect, secre tary, and treasurer. c, Form an examining committee of at least four members. If any member has been rated elsewhere, her experience should be helpful; such a ratingIsnot necessary, however, except in basketball and volleyball. (See 4 below.) Itis sugge.-d that members of the examining committee be exam'.'and obtain ratings from other affiliated boards w he nod possible. d Make plans for drawing up a constitution according to the sample copy received from the Officiating Sers ices Area. Plan to devote sonic time to the study of the rules andto practice officiating. If possible, secure the assistance ofsonic INFrnATION FOR AFFILIATED 1-ND PROVISIONAL BOARDS 121 rated ouitcial in each sport forwhich the Board anticipates gtning ratings. 4. Send to the OfficiatingSer\ ices Area Secretary the applicaiion form, t.vo completed copies Of the local constitution, anda check for 55 annual dues(made pay able to the Officiating Services Area), It basketb.z//ratings are to he given, an board must sendalistOf three National offiLialsinda pros mond' board must senda IN of three 01ftcaals with at least an Associate rating If1 ollerball ratings are to begiven, an affiliated board must sendthe name of one National and a pros isional board official must send the name of one oft Ith at last an Associate rating, A list oftour interested womcn must he sent if the board wishesto give wine in worts other basketball or volley ball than If a board washes continuedal Whit 1011 ID any sport, at the end oftwo years, an at tiliated hoard wdl requir:d to !line at least three be board will he required National (Alicia's, a pro\ 1,ional to have atleast three officials withat least an Associate rating.Approval of the application sill from the Officiating Services Lome Area Chairman who williequest that examination packetsbe sentto your Aftihated Board Chairman for all sports in which your Board IN auttioniedto giseratings."I heprocess of accepting an application affiliation of a new Board I(; and of requesting that theproper examination packets be.entordinal') takes several weeks Prospective Boards, therefore,should file for atiliation at leasi a month before they wish to holdrating sessions. 5. Administer Form A ofthe National Theoretical I To cover the operating \animation expenses, chante a small fee payableat the time of taking thewritten examination. hnin B of the National Theoretical hxammation who dui not pass Form A. may be administered to those 6, Conduct practice sessions in 'riling officials, All personson the examining committee who have notpreviously rated officials should have a minimum ofthree practice sessionsprim to actually rating. Secure theassistance of a rated official practice sessions if at ail possible. in these 7. Give practical examinationsto individuals who pass the examination. These should be conducted written the examining e mnuttee. by three members of 8. Request appropriate rating cards from the OSic crotary for distribution to those whopass the theoretical and practical examination. 9. Send lists of approved officials to schools and otherorgan/a- lions in the area. This notice shouldindicate the maximum fees for officiating in accordancewith the OSA policy and should 122 OGWS TENNIS - BADMINTON-SQUASH GUIDE give the name, iddress, rating, ind telephone number of each offiLial. 10 Keep accurate lists of all persons receiving ratings. Forward these lists to the chairmen of the Examinations and Ratings Committees in those sports in which your Board %as authorized to give ratings.

INFORMATION FOR AFFILIATED AND PROVISIONAL BOARDS 123 SOURCES OF INFORMATION ANDMATERIAL

Information Needed Source Board Policy Officiating Services Area Chair- man Policies and practices handbook.. Officiating Services Area Secre- tary Rules interpretation DGWS rules interpreter for each sport. Secure the name from thecurrentGuideofthe sport. Expansion and affiliation Officiating Services Aiea Secre- tary Dues Officiating Services Area Trea- surer Officiating standards for each sport.Chairman of the Principles and Techniquesof Officiating Committee National Honorary rating Past Chairman of the Officiating Services Area

Materials Needed Source Rating cards Officiating Services Area Secre- tary Examination material Examinations and Ratings Chair- man for the spoit in wind] examinations are &sued DGWS Guides r)GWS-A AIIPER. 1201 Six- teenth St., N.W., Washington, D.C. 20036 Uniforms and emblems The Ilanold Company. Sebago Lake, Maine 04075

Officiating Services Area officersare listed wider Officiating Executive Board in this Guide. 124 DGWS TENNISBADMINTONSQUASFIGUIDE DGWS BADMINTON COMMITTEE' 1970-1972

COLLI GEORGL, Chan inn, North 1 exas Stale Univ., Denton 76203 KATHY In LDRI, Part Chairman, Lniv. of Northern Colorado, Greele) 80631 M. ALMA BLAKE, West Charlotte Senior High School, Charlotte, N.C. 28202 DOROTHY BURDFSIIAW, Univ of Texas at Austin, Austin 78712 LYNN CARPFNTER, I-au Galhe High School, Eau Gallic,Fla. 31935 SIIIRLLY A DUTTON, Unit01Wyoming, Luanne 82071 VER DA HANIS, Meade Junior Iligh School, Wichita, Kans 67211 DORIS I-.III-NDRSON, Illinois State Um\ ersity, Normal,Ill. 61761 MARILYN PARRISH, 'I illamook High School. `Fillamook, Oreg. 97141 MA R111- STIPIll NS, Wisconsin State Univ., I a('rosse 54601 BE rry lexas Lech UnitLubbock 79409 SW I HOMPSON "ItI, Box 464, Lugene, Oreg, 97402

Advisory Members 131 FEY BROWN, Associate Chairman, Vpoitt Gurdcs and (Mural Rules Committee, College 01 William and Mar), Williamsburg, Va, 23185 DORIS 1,Ill NDERSON, Badminton Pitnirple and Teihniquet of 011ierating Corn 'Mee, Illinois State Univ., Normal 61761 PATSY CAI DWELL. Badminton L\ammations and Rating% 0/m- inaret. North') exas State UnitDenton /6203

(mule material m.a,, prepared by 1970 1972 ( ommittee

DGWS BADMINTON COMMITTEE 125 TAWS BADMINTON COMMITTEE' 1972-1974

DORIS L. HENDERSON. Chan man, Illinois State UnivNormal 61761 COLLEEN GEORGE. Past Chairman, North Texas State Univ Denton 76203 SIIERAN LBENER111. Ben Eidson High School. Eidson AF13, Ala 98737 GEORGANNA S. COTTMAN, Easton Middle School. Easton. Md. 21601 RUTII ANN CIIRISTIANSON. Aggassiz Elementary School. 510 W. 38th St . Minneapolis. Minn. 55409 CAROL MONROE, West Virginia Institute of Technology. Mont- gomery. W. Va. 25136 DIXIE LU S out R. Indiana State Umv . Terre haute 47809 MARTHA STEPHENS. Wisconsin State Univ.. La Crosse 54601 JANE E. TARRING. Metcalf Middle School. LAeter. R 1. 02822 BETTY TEVIS, Texas Tech Univ.. Lubbock 79409 BETTY WALLACE. Henderson State College, Arkadelphia, Ark. 71923 PAULA WELCH. Eastern Kentucky Univ . Richmond 40475

Advisory Members JOANNE DAVENPORT. Associate Chairman, Sports Guides and Official Rules Committee, Um of Illinois. Urbana 61801 JEAN PAN KONI N. Badminton Principles and Techniques a! Officia- ting Committee, Illinois State Univ.. Normal 61761 JE E WIESER. Badminton Evammat zoos and Ratings Com- mittee, Sam I louston State UlmHuntsville." ex. 76203

Material for 1974-1976 Guile to be prepared by 1972 -,974 Commuttee. 126 DGWS TENNIS-BADMINTON-SQUASH GUIDE Construction of Self-Testing Practice Situations

VIRGINIA LEE BELL

rirguiza Lee Bell bus published reseal, h related to badminton. S!ie /Teen ed het I3 S degree from the Unirersity of Wisconsin, Madison, and lier S, and Mid) degrees from the University of Southern California, Los Angeles, She iscurtentlja professor of physical education at California State College, Los A ngeles,

A practice situation which includes self-testing is one in which the student keeps a record of eachtrial. A diagnostic record of performance will enable the teacher to be more effectivein giving individual help to students and can aid in analyzing the student's difficulty. In addition, such a record will show change although the student may not have reached the ultimate goal in the execution ofa skill Self-testing devices should be constructe.1 followingan analysis of the elements of the skill. Suggestions for analysis, construction of practice situations, and methods of scoring will be 0,..ented in the following discussion.

Analyzing The Elements of the Skill Many physical education activities include skills whi; h involve imparting force to a projectile in a specified direction, The skills should be analyzed in terms of force and accuracyIn describing force, one or both of the following questions should be answered. I. How far should the projectile go/ 2. What is the desirable trajectory of the projectile In describing accuracy, both lateral and vertical accuracy should be conside, z.l. Lateral accuracy refers to the size of the goal in terms of leftankllight. Vertical accuracy refers to the high point of the trajectory and /or the size of the goal in terms of up and down. Rules, strategy, and ability level of the students are valuable aids in skill analysisAs an example, the badminton short serve will be analyzed. Pow. Badminton rules dictate that the distance limn the short service line to the opposite court shalt be 13 feet and that a legal serve must land inside the opposite short service line. The diagonal CONSTRUCTION OF SELF-TESTING PRACTICE SITUATIONS 127 distance will be greater. The desirable forcerequirement, therefore, is the ability to project theshuttlecock 14 to 15 feet. Lateral Accurac j.The rules dictate that within the sidelines of a legal serve must land the service court a lateraldistance of 10 feet indoubles. Thismay be sufficient goal for placement is required abeginner. Finer at more advanced levels ofplay, thus requiring greater lateral accuracy. Thedegree of accuracy for player may be defined by the advanced the teacher as the abilityto place the serve within a 3- or I-footarea. Vertical Accuracy. Strategy indicates thata shoit serve should travel close to thenet. The skill level of the determining whether the high students aids in point of the serve shallbe defined as being within one footor two feet of the net. Summary The analysis of the short able to project the serve suggests that the studentshould be shuttlecock a distance of14 to 15 feet. The beginning student shouldplace the serve within wide, the advanced a lateral area 10 feet student should place theserve within an area 1 foot wide. The highpoint of the trajectory should of the net fora beginner and I be within 2 feet performer. foot of the net foran advanced

Construction of Practice Situations The self-testingpractice situation should be thestudent's performance constructed so that can be measured inrelationto the elements of the skill. Thesituation should require extra equipment and enable a minimum of same time. many students to participateat the As an example, a self-testing can easily be set up on the situation involving the shortserve line may be placed within badminton court Tomeasure force, a one foot of the short service lineon the side away from thenet and parallel to it. A thelines serve landing between will meet the forcerequirement. To measure lateral accuracy, the sidelines of the court smaller target (one foot may be used for a beginner,or a wide) may be marked offfor a more advanced performer. Tomeasure vertical accuracy, a stretched above the net string may be In this manner, the forceimparted to the projectile as well as lateraland vertical components of be measured. accuracy can When the performance ofa skill is dependent double self-testing situation upon a set-up, a may he designed to controlit. Testing the overhe-1 clearin badminton will provide technique, The analysis of an example of this the overhead clearindicates that a 128 DGWS TENNIS-BADMINTON-SQUASHGUIDE BADMINTON SELF-TESTING PRACTICE DRILLS

JOAN D. JOHNSON DOREEN IRISH

Joan 1) Johnson Is associate (hauman at the dei',Intent of pin sual education and athletics at California State College. 1,o,s Angeles She was editor0/the first edition (19581 of Selected Tennis and Badminton Articles She earned her Ph 1) degice limn the Univelaitv 0/ Southern Calijoinia Doreen lush received her 13 4depec pain California State College,1 as :Ingeles, old has been an active contributor 10 DGIVS (limey in Southern ("altfainia Sheis presentls isoibing on he, A, degree and is a part -time instinctal at Calitcn loci State College (Los Angeles) Selt-testing practice drills for the long serve, the smash, and the toiehand and backhand drives are presentedin this aitickach of thesuggestedpracticesituationsispresented according tothe purpose ot the skill as itis used in the game. a description 01 Magnin ot the physical setup as it might be used with beginners. procedures for participating in the drill, the method of scoring anda scorecard, and variations in the setup or sewing procedures to make the drill use! ul for more advanced students.

THE LONG SERVE Purpose File serveis a vital stroke in badminton because a point cannot be scored unless a play ei is serving Since serves must be hit underhand. and thus directed upward, they are consult:led defensive shots Else king, high wive is the basic serve employed in singles play. it should be hit high (some expeits say as high as 30 feet) and deep toa point above the back alley Experts iecommend a smiting position near the centre lineat about 3 or 4 feet behind the short seivice line, l'hus, if theserve is to be an effective weapon. itmust travel approximately 3l feet, and achieve a minimum height ot 15 feet at a distance of14 feetfrom thc net (high enough to go over the opponent's extendedarm and racket) In addition. it must Lind within the boundaries of the singles service count

BADMINTON SELF-TESTING PRACTICE DRILLS 131 Description o measure height (vertical accuracy), a string may be stretched horizontally across the back court 14 feet from the net and parallel to it at a height of 15 feet from the floor Various methods may be used to secure the string, such as fastening the string to poles, hooks, or nails on the walls, or taping it to balcony railings or sonic other permanent object. Where several courts are located side by side, the suing may be emended from one wall to the other to provide for more than one practice court. A target to measure depth can be provided with niaskino tape or chalk on the floor of the court A straight line drawn parallel to the hack boundary line and dividing the back alley in half will establish two target areas (Figure 1 ) In addition, itis recommended that another parallel line be drawn one foot beyond the endhneIn a game situation, most players would return a serve directed to this area rather than risk lettmg the bird drop A starting position, as indicated above, should be marked on the opposite side of the net in both servict courts

0

O 0'

4

Figure 1.

rs,NITiEPS (30(LND1 ULV LINES coo** STRING -0-0-o FLIGHT OF THE f3U,D 132 DGWS TENNISBADMINTON-SQUASH GUIDE Procedures the serve, Players should be organized inpartners, one to practice results. Four players canwork on one court, the other to score the has a box with 10 or 20 one pair in each servicecourt If each serverAfter i0 trials In one birds, practice proceedsmost efficiently. change to the other courtand then change service court, servers For each trial, the scorerjudges places with their scorer-partners. and marks the whether the bird goes over(0) or (U) the string scorecard with an 0 or U toindicate where the bird landed

Scorecard scorecard format. Pointvalues can be Figure 2 contains the indicated. Serves going overthe rope assigned to the target areas as but going under the score full value,those landing in a specified area rope score onlyhalf the value of that area.

Variations achieve a higher More advanced playersmight be required to the string could be raised tochallenge their 111111111111111 height, thus lateral accuracy ability level. In addition,finer placement in terms of advanced levels, thus linesperpendicular to the back is desirable at the center line boundary hue could be drawntwo or three feet inside and the singles sideline(Figure 3).

KAM. $1C14.,at. S. "NE V-oat 3t DATE

4, 2 .1

Figure 3. Figure 2 PRACTICE DR ILLS 133 BADMINTON SELF-TESTING THE SMASH Purpose The smash is the point-winning shotin badminton Usually the obtect is to hit the shuttle dnectly to the floor,speed and placement are also essential elements Possible target areasare directly at the opponent, at any open court space that may have beencreated by prim shots in a wily, to the weaker stroke side 01 theopponent, and down the line rather than cross-courtCross-court shots travel a longer distance and thus giveaslighttime advantage to the opponent or a beginner to learn how to smash horn aposition slightly in front 01 mid-cowl and anti down the lineat a mud -covet target, the shuttle must be hit from lull etension Itmust travel app,ouniately teet downward ata sharp angle and land within 3 fee' of the singles sideline t lateral accuracy

Description he practice of the smash requires a ConsistentsetupFhe setup may be controlled by stretching a string 13 feel highat a distance of teet troni the net (on the smasher's side)Two starting marks should be drawn on the floor 10 feet frontthe net. A second string should he stretched directly above thenet 8 feet front the floor Ott the other side of the net, theposition 01 the setup person and the target areas should be marked with tape or chalkaccording to the dimensions illustrated in Figure 4

13' 2 T I

F 'qui e 4.

® s' "PEriSon 134 DGWS TENN1SBADMINTONSQUASHGUIDE Procedures Groups of three participate most effectively at each station one performer, one persontohitthe setup, and one scorer The performer stands on the starting mark and the setup person stands in his marked position with a box of 10 or 20 birds beside him The setup should be an underhand serve that passes over the 13-toot string,ishittothe performer's forehand side, and pirmits the performer to smash from the mid -court position A line way be drawn on the floor II feet from the net and setups going j'ast this line may be rejected by the performer. The performer attempts to direct the smash between the net and the 8-foot string so thatit lands in the target area directly behind the short service line The sorer judges %%hether the bird went under or over the string and marks U or 0 on the scorecard on the spot approximating where the smash landed on the court Players rotate after a specified number of trials. On the same court two groups o' three can practice, and groups should change sides after each player has had a turn

Scorecard InFigure5, suggested point values have been placed on the diagram in case quantification of performance is desirable Shuttles passing over the eight-foot string score half the value of the target area

NAME 6K1LL 6M4sr4 DATE SCORE 31

r , i 1 0

,r..

i 1 I u. I u. 4 I I.', I

I `",k CO (s)

.---

Figure 5

BADMINTON SELF-TESTING PRACTICE DR ILLS 135 Variations In adapting the practice to intermediateand advanced skill levels, the ditticuity of the setup could be increased sothat the smasher must mdge a higher Hight and tut from asomewhat deeper position in the court (Usually thesmash is not usc..', from the back three or tour feet of the court 1 I he target areas canbe 'dined to increase demands made on thelateral accuracy 01the performer, and perbumers may practice directing smashes intothe cross-court target auras it desired THEDRIVES Purpose 1 he badminton drive is a torcetul, flatsidearm strokeIt c in be performed either as a loreliaucl or a backhand and isused when the approachingbirdisbetweenwaistand shoulder levelDove trajectory should he parallel to thefloor, the bud just skimming (»el thenet fhe beginner shun hibeill-deto drive Dom his own The mud -countto the opponents' mm-court area acrossthe net analysis ot the dose, tnerefore, suggeststhat the beginner should be able to project the bird in a Hat trajectory within12 or 14 inches of the net (vertical accuracy) through adistance of approximately 22 feet (force), causing it to land withinone-halt ot the singles court (lateral accuracy ) Description To measure vertical accuracy, a string shouldbe stretched 14 inches directly above and parallel to the net On oneside ot the net, two marks for the setup personsshould be made on the floor'_ test behind the short service line The hittingmarks are made 51/2 feet behind the short service line on the oppositeside of the court ( I igure

Procedures nor each court, play ers should be orgamied intotwo groups of three people The setup person, with a box of 10 or20 birds, stands on the seti.p mark and hits eachbud over' the smg to the performer who stansis on the hitting mark When ;hitting acorrect drive, the player must pivot and step toward the birdThe setup, therefore, should be to the side ot the hitter. in the ideal setup,the bird should behittohe performer between shoulder and waistlevel, the performer should then drive the bird backbetween the net and iestruning string. The third player isthe scorer, A player should hit 10 forehands on the light side of the court or10 backhands on the Jett side of the court, then change placesWith the other play ers and complete the drill 136 DGWS TENNISBADMINTON-SQUASH GUIDE tr. 0

Figure 6 Scorecard I he corer marks each trial on a simple diagnosticscorecard bigine 7) in ;elation to its landing pointon the court A V is scored it the bird goes under the siring and an 0IN scored if the bird goes over the stringIf a point total is preferred, two pointscan be g.v.en to each li trial that land, inside the court andone point can be given for each 0 trial By esamining the location of the20 hits, the player can determine it sufficient vertical force is being usedto gain the netessaiy depth toi a suctessiul drive.

NAME ,K1LL Wi ES DATE b:.074E rOtktSAQ0 0. GACK ANO 13

O

LA. 0 0

0

Figure 7

BADMINTON SELFTESTING PRACTICE DR ILLS 137 Variations The dtdl can be changedin various ways to become adaptable for more advanced performers In designatingtarget areas on the court (similar to those of the smash drill,Figure 5), lateral accuracy and greater application of force can bttested To accomplish this,a line can L. drawn across the court11feet from the net, and the pertoimer should be requiredto dive the shuttle past the line, For the very advanced player, thest:ng can be lowered to force the player to make the bird skim th'.het Another change would be to specie} either cross-court or clown- the -lineshots

138 OGWS TENNIS-BADMINTONSQUASHGUIDE Conditioning for Competitive Badminton

MARTHA STEPHENS Maitha Stephens received her I3.S degree from Appalachian State Teachers College, Boone. Ninth Ca whim, and her ALS. degree from the Untie, sits of North Carolina at Greensboro She is a physical education instructor atWisconsin State University,La Crosse,Wisconsin, where she has coached badminton for three veal

Is your badminton teani still moving well aftera day's tourna- ment' Is your badminton team still moving9 If not, thencon- ditioning may be your answer "I caching skills to perspective team membersis only part of a good badminton program Without proper conditioning. the skills silldeteriorate in the fatigue of the final minutes of the day Preparationforplayinvolvesthedevelopmentofendurance. strength, and agility. The following conditioning program has been usedat Wisconsin State University at La Crosse for the last two badmintonseasons The p:ograin is a preseason program and should be modified if used during the season. If pessible. the program should be startedat least lour weeks prior to the first tournament date Theprogram has the following main advantages (1) No special equipmentis required. (2) The program can he conducted in a gymnasiumor dormitory room. (3) The time needed per day is less than 30 minutes. (4)A record of each person's progress is submitted weekly, "I he weekly progress chartisillustratedinFigure1. Each grouping of exercises has a required exercise and a selection from which one additional exercise is chosen for the day. Theprogram involves a workout for four days a week, and the chartis given to the coach at the end of each exercise week. Group number four (Figure 1) is included for the purpose of determining the athlete's activitylevel which goes beyond the conditioningprogram and classwork requirements. The resting pulse rate and weightmeasure- ments help the coach identify potential health problems.

Description of Exercises

The endurance exercises should challenge both the aerobicand anaerobic sources of energy. By involving both of 'hese systems,one is able to gam the endurance necessary (1) to compete the long tournament day and (2) to achieve bursts of energy needed to playa single point.

CONDITIONING FOR COMPETITIVE BADMINTON 139 Na me

Week

Directions: Do at least two exercises from each grouping The required exercise must be done, then you may choose the other exercise from the list in each groupingFill in the appropriate block for the day. the time r.luired to complete the exercise, and the munivr of exercises onnpleted The range of accepted performance is indicated after each exercise.

Ls et< oe Groups Dar Tune ,Vumbe NI T W Th I'1'WThFITWThF Endurance *Run4-8 minutes Rope Skip50-100 Squat thrusts10-25 Grasshoppers. 10-25

2. Strength *`Sit -ups,10-30 Push-ups 10-30 30-90 seconds Ball squeeze50-100

3Agility *Agility lump. 20-40 Agility run' 5-10 Shuttle run 10-20 4. Other. not required but report any activity ex- clusive of class work that you have participated in during the week.

Resting Pulse Weigl

*Required exercise m the group

Figure 1, Badminton conditioning progress chart 140 DGWS TENNIS-BADMINTON-SQUASH GUIDE Overloadisintroducedintothe program by increasing the number of repetitions in a specifiedtune limit and/or by increasing the time limit. For example.at the end of the first week, the athlete might be running 10 laps in fourminutes. by the end of the second week, she might be running either 12 laps in four mmutesor 1 S laps in six minutes. Each girl is encouragedto overload her own exercise program based on her level of fitnessand individual needs. The amount of overload and its effecton the girl can be noted through observation which is supplementedwith the knowledge gained front reviewing each girl's weeklyprogresschart. The specific exercise underthe endurance grouping include running, rope skipping. and performingsquat thrusts and grass- hoppers. In the initial stages, therunning is actually jogging The rope skipping is a two-foot Jump. butvariations are allowed, The squat thrt4sts are performed toa four-beat count by squatting down from a standing po,ition, extendingthe legs into a push-up position, .uid then reversing lie procedureback to the standing position The grasshoppers are st,.rted froma push-up position with one knee flexed under the chin and the otheileg fully extended The legs then alternate positions to a two-beatcount with the hips lowering each leg change. on The strength exercises include thebent knee coil-ups push-ups, wall sit, and the ballsqueet e, The push-ups are initially the modified type, however, many girlsprogress to the point of doing a full length push -up. To perform thewall sit, each girl aligns her back with a flat wall and thensits with the knees at a right angle and the lower leg perpendicular to the floor. Theball squeeze is primarily for girls who have weak grip strengthAn old tennis ball is used and both hands are exercised. Theseexercises provide a workout for the abdominal, arm, leg, and gripareas of the body. Progression and overload are the keys to an efficientworkout Agility, the ability to changedirections quickly, is a must for good badminton players.Allthreeexercises includedinthe conditioning program regimea quick change ofdirection The exercises have been described by Colvin and Lester) The mho' jump involvesjumping forward and backwards !dative to foul squares marked on the floor. The right to the upper right girl JUnips from the lower square to the lower left square to theupper left square and then repeats thesequence The agtho runis a circuit which starts (coina home position which is 13 feet front a wal: Threesquares. each one a foot from the

Valerie Colvin and Mignon Lester, "Badminton Skills throughcircuit "I raining,"inrennmnauminton Guide 1.4(0 1970 (Washington, AAIll'ER, 1968), pp. 122.126. D.(' .. CONDITIONING FOR COMPETITIVE BADMINTON 141 wall with 5 feet between any two squares, ale marked oft on the floor 1 he number two square is directly in twill of the home base position A 5-loot net line is marked on the wall with a center focal point directly above the number two square. The girl running the orcuit starts at home base, moves to each square numerical order from home base, and returns to home vase eadi time. She always laces the local point on the wall Mach circuit counts as one time I he slurttle run is a shuttle between two parallel lines that are 16 feet apart The athlete starts behind one line and then shuttles back and forth, toughing each lineI adi line touched counts as one time.

142 DGWS TENNISBADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE International Team Play for Women: The Uber and Devlin Cups

DIANE MOORE HALES

Diane Moore Hales has held the following badminton tales. 1966 Junior National Doubles Champion, 1968, 1970, and 1971 California State Singles Champion: 1970 DG WS National IntercollegiateChampion,and1971US LadiesSingles Champion Diane was also a member of the 1971 US Devlin Cup Team. She is currently the badminton coach at California State Polytechnic College at l'omona, Oltforma, where she received her B A. degree in 1971 The and Devlin Cup competitions provide oppor- tunities for high calibre women badminton players in the United States to represent their country in international play. The Uber ('up competitionisworldwide, h 21 nations vying for the ladies' international crown. The Devlin Cun competition, however, involves only the United States and Canada. Both men and women take part in this competition.

The Cups and Their Donors In 1957 Betty Uber donated the hammered Ave' globe Aped by a wninan badminton player winch is the prize for the world ,ship women's team (FigureI )Between 1926 and 1951 she represented in 37 international matches in which she won 50 consecutive events, including singles, doubles, and mixed doubles. She won 53 titles in Western Europe and South Africa during her career, an awesome accomplishment. In 1966, Mr. and Mrs. J. donated a Meiling silver vaseto be awarded to the victor ininternational competition between Canada and the UnitedStates.Mr.Devlin won the All-England men's singles title six times between 1924 and 1931 and won the men's doubles title five times The Devlin's daughter, Judy Devlin Ilashman, has won a total of 59 national championships, including singles, doubles, and jinxed doubles in various countries since her first victory inthe 1954 United States championships Many of the national doubles victories were won with her sister, Susan Devlin Pend

INTERNATIONAL TEAM PLAY FOR WOMEN: THE CUPS 143 Figure 1.Ober CUD

144 0 G WS rEIVAII3 GUIOE Format for Competition for the Uber Cup Lonipetition, zones the world is divided into tour America, Asia. Australia. andEurope. The winners of each zone meet in final interzone ties Seven matches are played in each tie. Once singles and tour doubles, and cacti match countsone point. The Uber Cup competitionis held every three yea's. Hie first Devlin Cu() competition in1966 consisted of14 matches The number was too cumbeisome,however, and in 1971 the matches were reduced to sevenfour singles matches andthree doubles matches. The men play three matches.the women three, and match is mixed doubles one The Results The last Uber Cupcompetition was held in1957 when the United States team defeated Canada7-0 in Kitchener, Ontario. and then defeated India at bastbourne.1.nghind. 7-0 In the final round. the United States defeated Denmark6.1 to become the first holders of the Uber ('up. In 1960. Canadadefaulted and the United States went on to retain the Uber ('upby defeating the Danish team Philadelphia. 5.2, at In 1963, the United Statesnarrowly retained the Uber ('up by defeating England 4-3 in the final round. The teamswere tied by three matches each at the start of the final match of theevening. The competitors in the matchwere Judy Has lunan and Carlene Starkey verse'. iris Rogers and JennifeiPritchard The United States players were behind 2-8 in thethird game when they suddenly pulled themselves together andwon the game 15-9 and the Ubel ('up for the United States. The closeness 01 the 1463 Uber Cupmat oh signaled the end of .111 era, In 1966 entered the Ubei Cupcompetition for the lust time and deteated the United States5-2to win the cup in Wellington, In 1969, theJapanese retained the cup by defeating 6-1 in the linal round. The firstDevlin Cup competitionwas held in Concord, Nev. Hampshire. the United Stateswinning itII matches to 3, 1 he women on the team Judy Devlin Hashman,Lois Alston,I yna 13annaga. and Caroline Jensen playedoutstanding games. although two of the losses were attributed to theworsen. In 1971 the Devlin Cupwas contested for the second tune and the United States lost to Canada 4-3.The most exciting match of the evening was the womens. doubles, Thecontest was very close and ended with Barbaia Hood and Mai,ioneShedd defeating. Cailene Starkey and Caroline Jensen lieu18-15 in the third game. thus capturing the Devlin Cup for Canada International team playis a rewarding experience in which all young pionusing badminton players shouldaspne to paiticipate INTERNATIONAL TEAM PLAY FOR WOMEN: THE CUPS 145 The Woman's Role in Mixed Doubles

JUNE BURKE CLINTON SMITH

June Burke earned her bachelors and masters degrees in physical education at the University of Texas at Austin. She has taught badminton in public schools and at a private girls camp She is currently an instruclor and coach of the women' intercollegiate badminton team at the University of Tevas at Austin Clinton Smith majored inphysical education at Abilene Christian College, Abilene, Texas. Ile hac taught badminton Jor several rears at the Austin italicize ClubIn the 1968.69 season he and his partner earned national ranking in men's doublesIle hac served as presider:; of the Southwest Bad- minion Association and as anABAdime( for Jo/ the Southwest Region.

Badminton has often been praised as a sport of universal appeal. There is a challenge here for all novice or master, young or old, male or female The image of the game is enhanced further by the fact that it is one of only a few sports in which men and women may Combine their skillsA well played mixed doubles match is an exciting event The pace is fast and the players must be capable of quickdecisions and rapidresponses. PlayIscharacterved by explosive power allied with disciplined finesse hi spite of the exciting possibilities, mixed doubles is frequently accorded the -ugly duckling- treatment Inphysical education programs and tournaments, the mixed event is often avoided and sometimes completely ignored. In areas of the country where strong Badminton club systems do not exist, the reluctance to play mixed doubles may result from a Lick of knowledge of the game The current trend toward coeducational activity classes in schools and colleges otters increasing opportunities to teach Men and women to combine their skills in mixed events Although this articlepresents the woman's responsibilities in mixed doubles, the information should also be of interest tothe man.lie MUM understand his partner's role and depend noon her m fulfilling it. 146 DGwS TENNISBADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE Objective The objective in mixed doubles is to force theopposing team to hit the shuttle upward, givi'ig one's own team theopportunity to hit downward and "put the snuttle away." Successin reaching this objective consistently requires an effective combinationof strokes and court coverage.

Essential Responsibilities In mixed doubles the woman has three primary'responsibilities She must serve effectively, play the net aggressively,and receive boldly.

Serving The server's objective is to force the opponent to hit the shuttle upward. One of two essential serves may be usedto accomplish this goal (I) A short serve to the inside corner of theseivice court (2) A flick serve to the outside corner of theservice court The shortservetotheinsidecorner of the court should be dominant If executed correctly, it keeps the shuttle in thecenter of the court and eliminates the possibility of a smash. Any serviceused exclusively becomes ineffective If the receiveranticipates the short serve inside and moves closer to the short seivice line, theserver should flick the shuttle to the outside corner If the two serves arc to be effective, each must be practiced diligently and mastered. The short serve shouldrise only slightly above the net Almost immediately aftercrossing the net, the shuttle should begin its descent. If the serve does not fall belownet level very quickly, the receiver will be able to rush it and "put it away." To develop a good short serve practicing witha rope suspended 18 inches or less above the net is recommended. Thetarget area should be an I8 -inch square placed at the intersection of thecenter line and the short service line. The flick serve should begin in the samemanner as the short serve. A quick flick of the wrist, just as the shuttle is contacted, sends it over the receiver's head The shuttle shouldrise to a height only slightly beyond the receiver's reach and fall quickly Ifthe serve is too low, it will be smashed very quickly, if itis too high, the receiver will have time to move back and smash Because thedoubles service court is short, a poorly executed long serve is a liability. An effective flick sei re requires practice withan 18-inch square target area placed at the intersection of the doubles' sideline and the long service line.

THE WOMAN'S ROLE IN MIXED DOUBLES 147 The woman player should practice the shortinsole serve several times, then hit a thck ,rive She should nottry to give any outward indication of which Serve Is to be hit She shouldpractice the serve againsttierpaitner occasionallyElie man isusually the more formidable receiver because of his greater reachand quickness

Net Play At the net the unman maintains thegame objective 11cr efforts are to force the opponents to hit the shuttleup"I he following strokes will assist tier( I ) the hairpin drop, (2) the crosscourt drop, (3) the push shot, and (4) the net smash The hairpin and crosscourt dropsare played to the opposing net play el-the push shot should pass the net player andforce the opposing backcourt player to move up and hit under the shuttle The net smash is intended to "put the shuttleaway o hit a successful hairpin drop, the shuttle should be contacted within a few inches of the net tape The stroke isdirected straight himaid The shuttle should just clear the net and dropimmediately alter entering the opponents' courtWhen practicing the hairpin drop, the playei should think of it asa touch shot. Rather than stroking the shuttle, she should simply reach out and touchit. Wrist action is very slight. 'I he crosscourt drop shotis angled toward one corner of the opponents court, away from the net player. Wrist actionis mole pronounced than in the hairpin drop because the shuttlemust travel farther Like the hairpin, the crosscourt drop shouldbe contacted nearthenettapeand dropimmediatelyafterenteringthe opponents' court. A drill which combines the hairpin and crosscourt drops willhelp the woman player develop her ability tomove along the net Two players, A and B, stand opposite each other atone end of the net Player A hits a hairpin drop to B. Player Breturns with a h,,pin Player A then hits a crosscourt drop Player Bmoves to the opposite end of the net and returns the shuttle witha hairpin drop Playei A returns with a hairpin. Player B hits a crosscourt, and thepattern is repeated. It the drill is begun with the playet in the forehand court, all of the crosscourt drops will be forehand If the drillis begun with the player on the backhand side of the court, thecrosscourt chops will be backhand. Initially, the drill may be practiced between thedoubles' sideline and the center line. As the player's skillimproves, the dri!I should cover the full width of the court. Note that a cross-court drop is followed by a hanpin drop When the shuttleis near the center limits of a player's reach, the crosscourt isvery difficult to hit. 148 DGWS TENNIS-BADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE or additional net practice, a gamean be played in which the back boundary is the short service lineteach point begins with a Omit serve and all tollowing strokes must be drop shots, The push shot is a stroke which icontacted at of above net k and angled downward to a point just bey mid the opponents' shot service line As Cie name implies, the shuttle is pusued across the net rather than stroked The intent of the push shot is to pass the ntt play et and force the backcourt player to move in and Int the shuttle upw ird 1 he net smash is the woman's most offensive w Y,i iron: point above net loel the shuttle is angled sharply Li.iv 'ward across the net A strong wrist snap imparts enough spLe0 to the net smash to make it almost impossible to return, 1-ven in the rare event that the shuttle is returned, the return will base to be upward Io pra2tice the push shot and 'he net smash, the woman shout,: enlist the aid of her partner. St..,iding opposite each (tiler abc it imdeourt, they should bLgin a series of medium paced drives.t he man remains in the nudcourt position The woman moves gradually toward the net positionAs she moves closer to the net, she will contact the shuttle higher and have greater opportunity to hit downward It the shuttle13high enough, the woman should smash it it not, she should use a push shot 'Hie woman player should keep in mind that as she mows closer to the net she will have to respond progressively faster to her partner's drives ('are should be taken not to move in so close that space in winch to maneuver and time in which to react are limited

Receiving Anotherresponsibilityofthe woman ploveristoreceive. Quickness isessential to a good service return The so°, er the receiver can reach the shrt serve the better her chances of hitting a successful drop or push shot1 he quicker she can move back to receivethe long serve the better her chances of smashing the shut tle If the serve is short inside, she should either drop or push the shuttlepastthe left(non-racket) shoulder of the opposing net player. A short serve directed toward the sideline can be most easily returned with a drop or a push shot straight ahead A position close to the short sf rVICC hue will enable the woman player to reach the short serve soon after itcrosses the net. Iler position should also permither to cover the two back corners ofthe service court Constant awareness of all of the possibilities will make her less vulnerable as a receiver. A smash directed toward the nearest sideline is the most offensive return of a long serve. If tae receiver cannot reach the shuttle in time

THE WOMAN'S ROLE IN MIXED DOUBLES 149 to smashit she should drop itto the nearest corner. A clearing stroke1140be employ ed as a last choiceIt the receiver clears, she should maintain her court position to defend against the possibility of a smash 'I he woman play ershouldPracticeherreturns againsther partner's serves As her speed Ificrc. :sec she should move her receiving position closer to the net When she can assume a position within two feet of the line and still reach a long serve, she can with assurance Formations Up-and-Back I he predominant court formation in mixed doubles is up-and- backIn the up-and-back sy, of play the court is divided into two areas"I he area usually played by the man is bounded by the short service line, the right doubles sideline, the endhne, and the left doubles sidelineFire area played by the woman extends from the net to the short service line and from sideline to sideline After the service, the woman assumes a position immediately in front of the "1." Since her proximity to the net does not allow much time to -nepare for strokes, she should hold her racket at net level ready to ho avoid blocking any of her partner's strokes, her racket should be held in front of her body. broin her netposition the woman should play the shuttle as often as possible The opportunity to make an offensive play is enhanced if the shuttle is played be It reaches the backcourt Flw sooner the shuttle is hit, the less tine the opposing team has to prepare for the return. If the net player cannot reach the shuttle while itis still in front of her body, she should let her partner move up and play itOnce the shuttle has passed the body, the number of possible returns is severely limited The up-and-back system is most effective during offensive play. If an error allows tne opposing team to hit the shuttle downward, the up-and-back formation should be relinquished temporarilyWith both players in Cie middle of the court, one behind the other, neither one can reach a well hit smash placed close to the sideline

Sideby-Side The side-by-sideplaying formationisthe better system for defensive court coverage. The courtis divided in half down the center line. Each player assumes a position slightly cioser to the net than to the endhne in his or her half of the court. Both players should be prepred toreceivea shortor midcourt shotThe opposing team not likely to cede its offensive advantage by hitting 150 OGWS TENNIS-BADMINTON-SQUASH GUIDE a deep shot 1 le side-b)-sidesystem Of play should be only whenA1.Ill IS 10fled nuo a deteitstve employed momentum isregained, the inure Sallat1011, Once Oftensne ..hould be resumad aggressive up-and-back 5) stem

Rotation The third methodotcourt coverage Specific areas of is the rotation system resoonsibility are not delineated.The ofnective of rotat'on is simply to fata void on the -ourt When forced ton extreme side or ;miler of one player is moves to corer the unprotected the court, the other player combination ot Initially, rotation is a simple the up-and-back andside-by-side,v stems The Woman plays the net most ofthe time, but c,casionally to the side-by-sideposition to defend against is moves back experience increases, the sin ash As game position on the court, includingwoman player ma) rotaiL to playan) I he Nkoman's role the backcourt position in mixed doubles is nota reticent onetier responsibilities challenge herskill

THE WOMAN'S ROLE INMIXED DOUBLES 151 Partnerships With A Plus

BETTY W. TEVIS

BeloIt'Term re«nred her B A.. 13 S., and M A. degreestow, Texas Woman's Unaersny, Denim, the meson timc ou' is on leave from Texas Technological Untrersto, Lu11fin I.and is winking toward a Ph.D. (levee

Fora winning doubles paitnership,foe following ingredients are necessarytwo players and a ki,owledge ot double, systems. There are three doubles system,_.up-and-back, side-by-side, and in-and-out. Many badminton ;:layeis use the up-and-backor side-by-side system because (Ito:, do not understand whois responsible for shots in the or combination, system. The chart below describes the play ers' responsibilities in the situations whichoccur in the doubles systems

Up-and-Bach Side -br-Side hi-and-Out DURING SERVICE SERV! R Serves adjacent Selves adjacentServes adjacent to the intersec- to the intersec- to the intersec- tion of short tion of short tion of short service line service line service line with center linewith center linewith center line SURVER'S Stationed aboutStationed in Stationed about PARTNER two feet in frontcenter ot her two feet in front of doubles backside ot court of doubles back service line, scrx ice line, straddling cen- stiaddling cen- ter line ter line R EIVFR Stationed ap- Stationed ap- Stationed ap- pioximately proximately psoximately two feet behindtwo feet behindtwo feet behind short service short service short service line, two to line, two to Me, two to three feet Ironsthree feet fromthree feet from center line center line center line 152 DGWS TENNIS - BADMINTON - SQUASH GUIDE ('p-and-Bach Sid( -hi -Side In-and-Out RI CI IVER'S Stationed aboutStationed in Stationed about PA RTN R Iv.° feet in front Leiner of her two feet in front of doubles hackside of court of doubles back service line, nest service line, nest to renter line to center line

AFTER SERVICE SI Mil( Mores to tenterMoves to centerle wortservice. net. am ima- of court I rom moves to center mate)), one foot\\filth service of net, approxi- in front of shortis eseimied mately one loot serA RA.line in front of short service line, if long or ()liven service, moves to center of court front which service is e se- "uted RVI ICS Remains two Remains in If short service, PAR -I tit R feet in fiont of center of her remains two feet doubles back side of cowl in front of service line, doubles back stiaddling Len- service line, to line straddling cell- ter line, if long or driven ser- vice. moves io center of her side of court

Moves to centerNI oyes10cen- If short return, net approxi- ter of her moves to center mately one footreceiving court of net, approxi- in front of mately one foot short servk in front of short Iii c service line,if long return, moves to center of her receiving court PARTNERSHIPS WITH A PLUS 153 1\1

lip -and -Back Side-ki -Side In-and-Out lC I- IV I: R'SRemains two Remains in cen-If short return, P 1121-Nb12 feet in front 01 ter of her side 01remains two feet doubles back court in Iront of service line, doubles back straddling cen- service line, ter line stiaddling center line, it long le- turn, moves to center of her rec ening Court

DURING PLAY

DTTP Liken by back Liken by playerIt ut up-and-hark II AR BY player on that side(11 position, taken by OPPONTN1 court back player. tip play er moves to cent er of opposite cort and players take side-by-side positions, ifin SIde-by-sideposi- tion, taken by player on that side

DRIVE OR Takeo by back Taken b% playerIf inup-and-back SMASH player on that of position, taken by DOWN SIDE court back player, up OF COURT player moves to BY OPPO- center 01 opposite NEN1 court and players take side-by-side positions, if in side-by-side posi- tion, taken by player on that side 154 DGWS TENNIS-BADMINTON-SQUASH GUIDE tip-and-Bat I, Sid -bl n -a tid-0 c4 DR OP SI1OiTaken bs up Iaken bs playerII In up-and-back BY OPPO- plat er on that side of position. taken NI N I court h up play er and play ers remain in up-and-back posi- tion until nest leat or drive. it in stele -bs -side position. taken by play er on that side scho crates to tenter 01 net apyrommately one loot in trout 01 shot tSCIA line. partner moves to center hack position

r ROSS- 1 ak en bs ap I alien by ;laserII in up-and-back ('OUR-I OR playel On that side nt position. taken IIAIRPIN touit by up player, and NI I S1101 phis ers !email) m BY up-and-back post NI lions until nest Blear or drive, 11 in side-by-side positions, player ho lilt original drop shot should has e 'nosed to net to take re- turn net Hight IA, lute partner mos es ') cent et hack position

CH AR OR Returns to t en-Retains to cen- IIIIIup-and-back DRIV1 BY ter net it up ter of iler sine position. moves PLAN I R play er or tenterui tarot to side -y-side back it ha, 1. position. it in pia,2I side ,y-sIde position. remains that position PARTNERSHIPS WITH A PLUS 155 p-and-Bat A Suit -1)1-Side In-and-Out CLhAR OR Remains in her Remains in het \loes to or le- DRIV1 BY posit ion position mains iii side-bN PA RTNI-R side position, inoL mg to Court opposite rattler S%1 AS11 BY Returns to ,en-Returns to ten- ;;; 6p-and-back YI R tei net it up ter ot her side otposition, ienianis player or Len teiLouit in that posting),it hdL I.tt had. side-ht -side plaer position. mows to Lentei hail. .)osi- tion pdt tner filmes to net

S%1 \SII WI Remains in he; Renhuns in he It in up-, nd-hat_k p N. R position posit lull posIt1011 remelt!, IP (11,11 pose,' in. it in stele -h. -sloe' position, mows t.i net positionas partner moves to LCIlICI back posi- tion

(A/Hz!!! \r)Returns to Len-Returns to Len- It In up- and -hack DROP BY ter net it up ter ot her side position, !entail)s Ph \ YI R plat er tenteiot Lourt in that position. haLk it hdLk it inside ht side plater position, motes 1,1teinei net 0051 toll as pati- ne( misses to hack

()VI RIII 11)Rennnns in het Remains in her Ii up-and-hat k DROP BY posit on posts 1011 posit lollFCII141111S PAR I R III (hat pO1(1011, it in side -ti-side position, (noses to tIlk net posting) as part- ner motes to L cutlethied. 156 DGWS TENNISBADMINTON-SQUASH GUIDE A Decade of Research

SHIRLEY A. DUTTON BETTY R. HAMMOND Shirley A Didion was a number of the 1970-72 Badminton Guide Comm:Ike. Bet ti R. Hammond is a phi steal education instructor at the Unn eisztt of Wyoming. I aramie. Wyoming and has coached high school into' college badminton teams. She iscuricnajworking toward thedoctoral degree atthe Omer-sin of Vorihern Colorado. Cleelcr.

Annotated Bibliography from Research Quarterly

Instructional Methods LL. VIRGINIA 1..11. "Augmented Knowledge of Results and its Effect upon Acquisition and Retention of a Gross Motor Shill Research Quarterli 391March 1968).'_5 -30. The badminton long serve was practiced 20 times daily for eight days b> 78 college students. Four different methods of using knowledge of results were presented .ind the subjects were randonily do, ided into our groups according to the method used. Subjects in the variabfe groups were told the error on each trial and asked to to to correct that error on the next trial. Subjects in the quantitative group %vele told the direction of the common error for 20 trials and were asked to attempt to correct that error. error on the 20 trials the following day. With the aid of a chart showing the landing point of each serve. the subjects m the qualitative group woe asked to determine and correct the most common error of the 20 trials. A control group practiced 20 long serves each day. The conclusionwasthat augmented knowledge does not further affecttheacquisition or retention of askillatthe beginning level of skill when sufficient knowledge of results is provided in the task. BURDESHAW. DOROTHY. SPRAGNS. JANE E.. and WFIS. PATRICIA A. "Evaluation of General versus Specific Instruction of Badminton Skills to Women of Low Motor Ability. Research Quarterly 41t Dec, 1970).472 -477. In this test. 106 subjects were divided into three groups. 71w firstgroup had participated ina basic skills course prior to badmintoninstruction.The secondgroup was enrolledIn badminton for the first time. The third group, p, nor to badminton A DECADE OF RESEARCH 157 instruction, was participating in another sport. Results showed no significant difference between the groups on badminton skill, and the theory of specificity in learning motor skills was supported. FOX. MARGARET C.and YOUNG. VFRA P. "1 fleetof Reminiscence on Learning Selected Badminton Skills.'' Research Quarterly 33(Oct. 1962). 386-394 The effects of vaiymg lengths of instructional periods and non-practice periods on reminiscence in badminton were Investi- gated. At Parsons College 68 women students who enrolled in service classes were used as subjects. Reminiscence occurred in the wall volley skill. but did not occur 111 the short serve skill. "I he longer period of instruction did not contribute significantly to long-term retention of the wall volley. GRAY. CHARLES A. and BRUM BACH, WAYNF B. "I fleets of Day lightProjection ofFilm Loops on Learning Badminton. Research Quarteilv 38( Dec. 1967 ). 562-569. ty male undergraduates were taught badminton during a period of 30 classes.In2 01the 4 classes. instruction was supplemented by viewing homemade loop lilies of seven basic strokes and loops of singles and doubles play. Subjects viewed the films twice at each class meeting during the second through filth weeks. Only those with a pronounced skilldeficiencywere required to view the films during the seventh and eighdi weeks. Results showed that those viewing loop films learned the skills faster than the other groups. Conclusion thawn was that using loop films facilitated learning.

Related Factors PYFCIIA, JOHN Comparative Hied, ofJudo and Selected Physical almationActivities on MaleUniversityFreshman Personality Traits. Rescoch Quin tells 41(Oct. 1970). 425-431. At the University of Noith Carolina 149 male freshmen were used to compare (lie effects of three physical education courses on specific personality traits. The classes consisted of (I) eight weeks of Ifollowed by eight weeks of Judo II. (2) eight weeks of followed by eight weeks of volleyball: and (3) eight weeks of badminton followed by eight weeks of basketball. Personalitytraitmeasin es obtained by('attell's SpacenPet sonality Factor Questionnaire indicated that subjects enrolled in judo became more warm-heal tech easy going. and participating than did the other subjects. THORP1. JOANNI'. Intelligence and Skill in Relation to Success in Singles Competition in Badminton and TennisResetneh Quo- terh 38( ). I I9 -125. 158 OGWS TENNISBADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE The intelligence and skill of college women in relation totheir success in tennis or badminton round-robinsingles competition were investigated. A total of 379 subjects, rated onthe basis of a skills test, were divided into leagues of 8 to II players each. The coefficients of correlation were .65 between skill and success in badminton and .60 between skill and success in tennis.Coeffi- cients of almostzero were found betweenintelligence and success.

Bibliography Compiled from Completed Research inHealth, Physical Education, and Recreation

Instructional Methods AMTS, EVELYN "A Compauson of Two Methods of Teaching Badminton Skills." Master's thesis. Washington State University. 1963. ANZA LONE. CHARLOTT F 13. "A Manual for Teaching Bad- minton to Beginners and Intermediates."Master's thesis, State University of Iowa, 1963. BELL. ROBERT D. "the Use of Music as an Aid in theTeaching of Selected Badminton Skills.- Master\ thesis, Universityof Oregon. 1965. BRACKEN, DOLORES. "The Values of CollegeCoeducational Badminton." Master's thesis, Springfield College, 1964. BROWN. DUCH' PATRICIA. "1 he Effect of AugmentingInstr ie- uon with an Improvised Tear. lung Aid forCollege Women in Learning Selected Badminton Skills.- P.E.D dissertation,Indiana University. 1969. CARTER, GINGER fa LLEY. "A StudyoftheRelationship Between Specific Conditioning\crows and Selected Skills in Badminton and Archery of Freshmen Women StudentsEnrolled uiPhysical Education (lasses at Amarillo College inAmarillo, e \as.- Master's thesis, TexasWoman'sUniversity,1906. DONAGIII SHEILA JANE LE, "Th, Fffect of a len-MinutePeriod ofProgressive Rope Jumping Exercise on Certain Elementsof PhysicalFitness and on Badminton Achievement ofCollege Women.- Master's thesis. University of Washington, 1963. GASSON, IVO S.11. "An 1. xpernnent Detel mine the Possible Advantages of Utilaing Instant television forUniversity Instruc- tioninBadmi n tort('lasses."Master'sthesis,Universityof Washington, 1967. McLELLAN, MARY I. "A Study of the Use of Mugs as anAid in Teaching the Badminton Serve.' Master's thesis,University of lovva. 1964. A DECADE OF RESEARCH 159 MILLER, SUSAN ELIZAB1 TH.I he Re lame Fite, iiveness of High School 13adminton Instruction %%hen Givenin 1 m.0 Short Units and One Continuous Unit Imolving theSame hit al Time. Masters thesis. University 01 Washington,96-1. NEUMAN, BONNIE J. lite Effect ofa Sett-Instructional Program of Badminton Rules on the knowledgeand Playing Ahilit> ol Beginner Badminton Players. Master'sthesis,Univetsityot North Cal ohna, 1965.

Tests and Measurement DAVIS, PIIYLLIS ROSANNA. "'I heDevelopment ot a Combined Short and long Badminton Seivice SkillTest." Master's thesis, University 01 Tennessee, 1968, GREIN1 R, MARILYN R "Constithlion01 a Short ServeI est for Beginning Badminton Players.- Master'sthesis,University of Wisionsin, 1964. !LICKS, JOANNA VIRGINIA. ""I lieConsti uction and I valuation of a Battery ot Poe Badminton Skill Tests.Ph.D. dissertation. e \as W0111,111's University, 1967, JOHNSON, ROSE MARIE "Defrinnnationot the Validity and Reliability of the Badminton Placement lest,-Master's thesis, University of Oregon. 1967. WALKUP, MARY J. "The Predictabilityof Success ui Boggling and Badminton. Ph D. dissertation, Universityot loss a, 1966. WASHING I ON. JEAN. -Construction01 a Wall'lesttoit he Badminton Short Senc, and thEllect ot Wall Practice on Court 'L41:rmance." Masters thesis, North 'TeasStateUniversity.

Physiology BA RI1.1 ,BARBARA A.'''[he Hied otApplications ot Principle the olOverload on the Development of Ph I) chssci 'anon, University 01 Southern Calitoima,1965. RAIS1ERS, 1,1,1DMILA NOVICK'S. "13,1(1111111tonas a CaRhovascular Stressor. Masters thesis. University otCahtoi ma at Los Angeles. 1968, WI 121 Z. CAROL A. "lelemetered DealtRates ot College Women in Physical Education Classes." Mastersthesis, Temple Umveisity, 1967.

Motor Learning

CRANSTON. VIRGINIA AM I S. "A Study 01 theRelationship 01 Reaction Time. Movement"I line. and Visual 'hacking toPei- loriname in Badminton. Master's thesis, Smith College,1967, 160 OGWS TENNISBADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE DANA LS, DIANE. "Transfer of l raining and Retroactive Inhibition Existent in the Learning of a Selected Tennis and Badminton Master's thesis, North Texas State University, 1968. IIACKFT I, LAYNI CLAIRE. "A Study of the Effect of Form on Skill in Badminton."Mastel's thesis, University of California, 1963. HARRIS, DORIAN E. "The Effect of Selected Agility Activitieson Badminton Playing Abilities, of Women atthe University of Oregon." Master's thesis. University of Oregon, 1963. O'CONNOR, PATRICIA 'I. "A Study of Speed and Skillin Relation to Success Achieved by College Women 1.ngaged in Badminton Singles Competition." Ph.D. Dissertation, Texas Woman's Um- veisity1965, IFRGI RSI N, RU FlI L. "The Relationship of Selected Measures of Wrist Strength, Vision, and General Motor Ability to Badminton Playing Ability." Master's thesis, University of North Carolina, 1964. 1FTRI.AULT.I MIN II. "A Mechanical Analysis of Two Bad- minton Seises.Master's thesis, Springfield College, 1964.

Physical Fitness SI 1.RI b. MARY J.P. "The Relative El fectiveness of Four Activity ourses on the Development and Maintenance of Physical Fitness inCollegeI.reshmen Women."P.E.D.dissertation,Indiana 41n,,eisity, ,it 963.

A DECADE OF RESEARCH 161 Selected Badminton Bibliography Revised by: VEROA HANES Mead Junior High School Wichita, Kansas

SUE THOMPSON Eugene, Oregon

Books Al NSWORTIDOROTIFY et al.. eds. Individual Spoils for Women. 4th ed. W.B. Saunders Co., W. Washington Sq., Philadelphia, Pa 19105. 1963. Imerzean 13adminton Assot town IlandbooA. Virginia Lyon, esseeu- tne sect etary. ABA. 1330 Ale \andma Dr.. San Diego, Calif 92107. S2.00/yeai. Merl( allBadminton ;Ism( uzizonRidebooA. Lester1111ton,15 "langlewood Dr., Cumberland. R.I. 02864, BADMINTON ASSOCIATION OF I NGLAND. Knots the Game Badminton. Sportshelf, Box 634, New RoLhelle. N.Y 10800. 40 pp. S.75. BADMINTON ASSOCIATION OFI NGLAND. oresto,Bad- minton Coaches. 8IA High St.. Bromley. Kent, Unglani:. 1970. BARN! S, MILDRED J..et I.Spots 4( urines ItoGills and Women. Appleton-Century-Crolts, 440 Pails Ave, S., Yoik. N.Y. 10016. 1966. 13WSS, MARGART VARNT R. Badminton2d td. William C. Brown Co., 131 S. Locust St.. Dubuque. Iowa 52003. 1971. BROER, MARION, etal. Individual Sports lor Women. Hula. dclphia. W.B. Saunders Co., 1971. BROWN, Edward. The Complete Book 01 Badminton. Stack pole Books. Cameron & Keller Sts., Harrisburg, Pa. 17105. 1969. DAVIDSON. KENN-111 R. and GUSTAVSON. 1,1 LAND R Win- ning Badminton. Ronald Press ('o., 79 Madison Ave.. New Yolk. N.Y. 10010. 1964. DAVIDSON, KENNETIi R. and SM17 11.NORI C. Badnutrirm. Sterling Publishing ('o.. 419 Park Me., S., New Yolk, N.Y 10016.1961. 1)AVIS, PAT. Badminton Complete. A.S. Barnes & CoForsgate Dr.. anbui y, N.J. 08512. 1967. DOWNEY, LC. Betio Badminton for B. Pelham Books, 26 Bloomsbury Si.. I ondon, England. 1969, 162 DGWS TENNISBADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE FORGIL, IIUGII,You Can Mau BadmintrrnCoil land Racket Division, Cortland, N.Y. 13045 S 25 GRI-GORYDOUG!, A., andWL1313. G1 RA LI).Tearlung Bad- minton BOA 1 y pc. 203 Osward. Com t%%oodLane, Addington, Surrey, England. 1970 /huldhool,Of the International Badrninton iederation53 Westwood London SF 23, Fngland 250 pp. S 40postpaid. LIFF1 [Nth SPORTS I-DUCATION PROJ F Nets jot Badminton Instruction AMIN K. 1201loth St.N.W., Washington, I).(' 20026. 1967. NHL( L K. DONNA M AL and try. KMIII' RINIIndividual and Ram Sports lot (Cowen. Prentice -hall.Inc N J 07632. 1955 l'nglev.00d Chits, l'11.1 ON. BARRY (' Iladnuntm, N J. 076.i2 1971 Fligle%wod Chits, POOL1 JAN11 SBadminton,GoodyealPublishing Co 1;115 Sunset Blvd Palisades. ('alit 90272. 1969, ROG! RS. WYNN dianced Badminton (' Brown, Co 1970 Dubuque, lo\a. Wilham SPORTS ILL US'l KA I 1 I)S 1 AI I'StuntsIllustrated Book of Azdminton _LW Lippincott Co., IWashington Sq.. Philadelphia. Pa. 1910b. 1967 1 Y1 I K. J()ANN,ed.Sidel. fad?clinic-Badminton.Is to les AAIIP1 R. 1201 16th St, N W , Washington. D ('20036. 1970. VA'\IL K, NIARY1111 N and POINDIXI'l K, 11A1 1 Y 131 111. 2d adbidn ulual andI cam Sports'Irtr (,ills and Women, Pluld- dclpiud W B. Saundeis ('o, 1968

Magazines

Badinintibi(-azattc.11 A Scheele, ad NI.,dena BromleyNeut. I nglanu 51.40 6 issues Budllittnoti 1.5 (formerly Bird ( haw! ).,Beatrice Nlassman, ad., 333 Saiaioga Rd., Buttalo, N.. 14226 x3.00/ } ear

Free Materials (in quantity .,r classes) Badminton and %emus Strokes, Asham.aProducts, his, Ashay.ay. K 1 02x04 24 pp. Guide to Bette, Badminton AsImly Inc Aslmay 02804I6pp. R.I

Equipment HICKS, VIRGINIA. "Puichasingand (',laof Badminton mem I quit OCR'S Marls- Badminton Guide. I066-1 ()We, BIBLIOGRAPHY COMPILED FROM COMPLETED RESF.ARCH 163 Evaluation

HOOKS, FI)G.Alt 1A, J Hooks Comprehensive Knowledge Test inSelectedPhysicalFducation Activities 101CollegeMen." Resew di Quo terh 37 (Dec1906),506-514. Mc( U J ANUT WI'"Skill"I csts (miry Badminton Guide.1962-1904 NI UM-\N, BONN!! "Knowledge Challengers DGIV.5Ten,,tc /3adnuirtonGuide I908-1970 WI ISFR, .11-ANLFT!"."College Testing Program for Beginning Badnunton."DGIVSTe mus-Bad min ton Guide,19,0-1972,

History BROW\,Bi FIN.The American Badminton Association Competi- tiveBad MID t 011and You.- DG 1(t?l:is-Badminton Guide. 1970-1972. RICHARDSON. DONALD. "Histoty and Fula.tion of the American Badminton Association."DGIVS eunts-Badmui ton Grad(. 1900-19W

Skills and Strategy DA) ,JUNI Strategy and "lactic, inI aches' Doubles 101IIIS-Badminton Guide.1964-1966 G IT! PLGGY. "Creating theOpportunityto Sone Dc WS Tennii-Badnunton Culde.1964-1966 LAND! ROOP, PIGGY. "Placement,Strategy,an (town of Serve." Tennic-Badminton Guide1966-1968 LAN DTROOP, "AdsancedBadimnion e( Jimmies DCIt'sTennis-Badminton Guide. 1908-1970 POOLI , JIM. "Mechanics of theihead Badminton Strokes "DGIVS lennis-/3a(binnton Guide 10'0-1972

Teaching Techniques BROWN, D. PATRICIA.Use of the Suspended Shuttle in Dey clop- ing Os et head St rokes." DG Temus-Badmoiton Grath, 1970-1972. BURTON, WRNON G "AI-caching Progression That Works DG Penns-BadhlintonGuide1964-1966. COLVIN VALERIE and LI,S1 ER, MIGNON. "BadmintonSkills Through CircuitTraining.-DGIVS Tennis-Badminton Guide. 1908-1970. VI-IN,J.FRANK. "Badminton nom theBeginning.-Bird ('hatter. Nov.-Dec. 1965. J FRANK. "i3adminton trom theBeginning."Bird Chatter March-Apnl 1966 164 DGWS TENNISDADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE backhand NiI01,N, (1101, sholl, ',mash, net flight,, around. the-head stroke,. loomork. and ,ome liutep Some Ntiokes ate 10 !ONA. 11101.1011 all \tro: C\ are tepeated tune, a",1 are in excellent I hi, him 1, ,anctioned the American Bad- minton .1,,oc whom. aPd t e,peciall>for in,t0tional u,e V(i iiet poi isin / dzkai.on. 17 nun ,1,167, .1 . color. Sale S80 IS)Loan ( 10). Slum, ho teacher, ma), e tem.. 'ructionnl the lie lifetime ,port, ot archer),, hoMing. golf at.1 badminton Voliong, v.Ith the bunted facilities found 1110,t !Wokttdemonshate, technique, of large group instruction mill/Awnofg' nmaNium, andpla mgfight,.improvNed material, and innoaho teaching Mkt,. Phil Badminton v./titIt'o,w A ng .SoonIS nun.,1 95`., b&. ItentalI tee On One of the greate,t pla) et, 01 11,11a) ,la, \\ong Peng Soon. the m.izard ot badminton demon,trate, the ba,it fundamental, of the game. !tom Lhoo,ing the iacket to ho each ,troke 1, evecuted Slo motion phologlaph, himg, out the liner (1

Filmstrip 11( i!mnins, Badminton Se etc s1,ts0 Lolot,Aith tecoid, 1')Si'.iilin,ttlp, vdth planation, tot each frame on accom- pan ing tecot d,.I he hlm,thp, coet( I) the game, (2) the mole, ,floplinL(111r the Nemo: ,troke, 14) the oeihead ,1 101,e, ('-) totehan,' ..atol,, andht the bacl,hand ,hohethe content and natation appear hot Ii'11 Badminton /m1?to101 >litad(and the Badmoimri /holdbo,k1h>psiid,riaimsmith,

Film Loops I he lolloinp loop, eft: deselopod m ittiJim Pool,',do I ernandt, Valk )1,11L( Noithlidge. ( alitotnia

aPid ,1 ( 1 2) ( at \o91'001',I ( ai t midge('Super 9c the gtip 1,c ,Iton a, MC the halt ,kill, 01 ,cting nu kit er lot NI ogle. pla and the ,hots ,ci C tot do11h1L 1)1,1 I egal ,trait denion,1 died

(17(11.1I 1 ,11,( 2)( \o 0 1.00 14 1 ( .1111011:C(1 011%.1 ti\2 (tc I hiloop liatutc, m,ltitttion on the Rindl- liitili,ll hull nieLham,in ot all oL rhad ,troke,. `wet. itictech- Timm holing tit lot,. drop and .11 e dCillothit diCti ill v.1110:10111. I: 11Ilk CA 01t 0111.0.t1,,1111C .Ippiltallull, ,11the ton,lu,iotl ot cat 11particul.11 dta attention to tomnion 'II III. g

SELECTED BADMINTON VISUAL AIDS 167 fh.erhead Bat Oland Strokes. (12). Cat. No. 91-0042/1 Cahn( lgod S $22.95 The same general !urinal used in demonstrating the o,,,erbead forehand stroke is repeated here with the backhand grip and tundamentals of t,backhand lob, drop, and smash, Cndrham/ Net Strokes. (12). ('at. No. 91-0059/1522.95. 1ore- hand and backhand underhand lobs and drops are demonstrated trout net positions. 1,mphasis is on footwork. body positions, and racket-hand andwristpositions. Caine applications assistin de monstra t rug strategy. Pro es and Around-The-Head Strokes. ( 12) Cat No. 91-0067/1. A completeskillanalysisofforehand and backhand drivesis presented. The more complex and deceptive around-the-head strokeis demonstrated with emphasis on weight transteland hand and racket positioning. Game applications al. presented. tau/hark. (121. Cat. No 91-0075/1. S22.95. Sharp renews and the ability to move rapidly from one position to another are critical the badmintonplayer. The most modern techniques of etticient .0 are presented with slow-motion close-ups of loot work I he following series of loop films was produced svitic Breen ()I George Washington University. Washington. I).(' , acting as consultantThe demonstrators are Jim Poole, Maigaret Varner. James Breen, and Janette Breen. All of these loops are in coloiBach loop is accompanied by a booklet zmplity mg the him contentRegular and slow motion as well as stop action are used in each loop to aid in analyzing 1, mous techniques. The complete set is available troth The AthleticInstitute for $;'34. Grip hid ( at king.( II) Code No. Cartridged Super SS18 95 Foot twrk, (I I). ('ode No ( -2 ( artndged Super SSIS 95 High Peep Selic. (11) ('ode No. ('-3 Cam trudged Super tiS I S.95. Lots Short .S'e/1 e. (11 ) ('ode No. (' -4 ( art mired Super SS IS 95. Dine Serve. (11) (c de No. C-5 ('artiudged Supe, SSIS."5. L k (i I ) Code No. (' -6 Cai tildged Super SSIX 95 e hand Or el head Shots/)e frame ( .111th king ( hal (II) ( ode No. ( -7 Cart ridged Super SS I 8 95 we ham/ Or et headSl1018 .)11415)1. 'it) ) ( ode No I Cartndged Super SSI 5.95. 13th shined 0e,Thead Shots De J ensoClo,111th king Clear(11) Code N ), ( -9SIS lla( OlandOr c/h( Shot( .Smash. ) ('ode No C-l0 51x95 e ShotsI ndel handlear ShotsI 111( ode No C-11 Cat Ridged Super siS18 95 Sls Vet .Shots ( 1 1) ( ode No ( -I 2 Cal (ridged Sup( S

168 DGWS TENNISBADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE Ir,mnd the Head Shots(blat. Smash. Drop. (II 1 Code No C-13 ( art ridged Super 8$18 95 Bulletin Board Materials Ba d171172 ton 're( hInglic Charts Washington. D.0 20036AAIII'l R. 1201 16thSi ,N W. 12Limns$1 50Cover Court, and equipment, forehand and baLkhand grips and sent, forehand dine. backhand drise, oserhead clea; stroke. loveclear stroke. smash and drop shots,netshots.flightpatterns, readiness

positrons for wort play. and tv pea of doubles play. BatimmtonCourts. Scormg. Strilses \mmal. Iii. 61-61I asv Post, 1305 42'.S1 50Alt raLtn eand inlormatn e display stresses sL ormg in both dot.bles and singles,t he di1 eren cc between a doubles and singles court, and the need touse a varlet 01 rok es

Film Distributors

(1 I 111 ,Ainerkan Productions and Publishers. eo (,gorge 13 Pearson. Dent 01 Health. Ph> srcai 1 ducation andRecreation, nn of Alabama, Um% ersit , Ala 3C4S6 12) At hletk Institute. 505 Merchandise Mart. Chicago,III 60654 I rank :lurch Films, 1815 Beverly Blvd. I 1 .('alit 9005" (4)( oronet Instructional Films, 65 iSouth Water St. Chicago, Ill 60601 (51 James 131)1.1: ( 0 1825 131%d .1. 1 Calif 0005- 16) Genera) Sport cralCo Id ,140 Woodbine. Bergentield. \ J 07621 t J I-rankDe% hn. RFD ::2.1)ollield Rd. OLLtngs Mills. Md. 2111" I S IA AIIPI R. 1201 16th St\ W ashington. I) (20036 (0)I ducators I;tride to Free 1 tint. P 0 Box 4S7. Spring Green. W is 53555 (101 State 1),:eLlors of Ilealth, Phskal 1 duLation, and ReLreatioq State Department ofI ducation. In all states 1thletk Institute SOS Meraandise Mart. (Imago. Ill60654 112)I cling I dm-I oops, 225 Mass ,1e ambridge, \lass 02140

\or,An% I alinglilin or set ()1 tams mg* be ordered on Super isReels for use with the Kodak 1 ktographa Protector by replacing the final 1 of the Catalog number with a3. these reels also Lome Lomplete %suit Lase and Wm notesI ahng himloops are availablein Regular at1ridges speL1,1 ordei ill quantities of not less than 50 mints 01 eaLh Wm. All tormats ale the same pikethe Complete 6

loop Set is SI 3- "0 (di. No N9-3644 1 1

SELECTED BADMINTON VISUAL AIDS 169 BADMINTON STUDY QUESTIONS 1970-72

Itcised 1).% the Badminton I C,inunatiun, and Ratings Committee.

PART I Directions

Select the one item %%hlkh hest ans.% els each question1ssuine no Cond 111011s etsi other 11141 staled A is al%%.*s ,erring I cam B i, alwa>s iek.ming Minh team has the option cot setting a Lame' 1. Setmg team B Rk,ei% mg team C I ithei the ser% mg or receRing team D. I he team that ITl%Cd first In the goine 1%. Ind' team sere, lust at the beginning of a game' A.teem %%inning the toss sei%es first in the lust game 13 leant that teLened inst in.1 game seers first in the ne,kt game . ieant %%intung the :irst game ser%cs Iasi in the srtond game I). 1e.ini that loses tie lust pine sel%Cs tint in the ,cloud game I he in" side ikIers to %%Inch teen(' A I he set-% mg !CAM B. I he le,eRtng team ( ,earn that isis ahead Ir points I) I 11, hist team to ,ere Ina game 4 When should a planet in a single, maid] ,ere (rout the tight ser.ike coot(' ,\ When side outouun B Mien pia) resumes alter stIsnCIIN1011 of pia) C hen a _',11/1e haN been s,t I).When the sone I12..13 C Whatisthe proper procedure %%henstn hmilte doubles malt h ' A ( all store then first set%1% bei Ole each point B all the store C. (.dl store then two sei di the lime it occur 1) calf 111,1 .clxikk ..-1,1 then the ,,ne tot c,ich point 170 DGWS TENNISHADMINTONSQUASIA GUIDE In which sitt.ation would the umpire not call a fault' A.The server swings and misses the shuttle 13 'I he server swings and tips the shuttle with her racket C. The server takes a step as she swings at -the shuttle I).A player from the opponent's court tails under he net and into the plat ing area. 7 Who is responsible for checking the correct II,ght 4d a shuttle' A.Linesman B Referee C.SeriLe court nnige I) Umpire 8It is the second game ot a ladles sinles match V hen do players change ends of the court' A.Score IN h-4. B. Score Is 8-all C. Score is 6-3 I) S,ore is 1 1-6 9 What Is the proper L ill made by the i.mpire to indicate "match point" or "game point'''' A 14-10 game point do not repeat agar 13 14-10 game pointre:,cat each time the plat er in the lead serves C. I.1, game point, 10. do not repe..t again D. 14, game point, 10. repeat each time the plat er m the lead serves 10 What is the proper procedure II the shuttle touches the top of the 'let' A. :1 during a rally, there is a fault for the plater who hit the shuttle into the net B. If on the serve, "ler. is called. ('.If during a rant, play continues I) If on the serve, itis a fault by the server 11 How should the names of plat ers in a doubles game be listed on the score sheet" A.The burst serer 11 listed lust and the reck.ving team is listed in any order B."I he first receiver is listed lust and the serving team is listed 111 any order C.Any order is acceptable. D.-I he first server on both teams Is listed lust 121 he store is 9-4 in the thud game of a singles matt h ',hen it is discovered players did not change ends ot the kourtRvhat us the prom'. .it

BADMINTON STUDY QUESTIONS 171 A ( hone t (iris,11soOtt as the ett01 t, disOnefed drOr l'°In1S "on all el Plat is should lists. t hangol 13 ( 'inge ends .is soon .is the mot is thstoveretE esisting store stands Ironott flange ends. drop all p >Mk Oh i pia) CIS should ha e (hanged 1) Do (tot t hang,* ends. eSistinO s,Ote stands

1 3 In .shish situation svould the (npile not (sill .1 lot'''. \ A spet lat01 .salt., het \teen two courts during a rail>

13 A shuttle tram a heath\ tout( 1;a\ cis mto the play mg area spec Linn rosy the bads of the pia) mg area rlav t rslips to the nom and is unable to return the shut tIe

14 What Is 11Ik slnnitttante 4,1 a d4,111,1t' vertit ol line drov. n through both storing tolonins oil a state sheet"' A I nd ot the game

13 Game set ( Beginning of the game I) Sets lee ovel ICWha, are the duties of the losing setsile lodge' A Cali faults made h the lecetter during the wife

13 Call .1 lel tai eat h wry Ike tommitted hv the sere( (' Call a "let" 101 the first semee tailh observed and Ludtit the plav tontumes to commit the !atilt I) Coll a fault lot eat h serv.fe fault tommitted hv theserer 16 When has the serve been delivered ' ,\ As soon as the serer begins het sty mg at the shuttle

13 As soon ,is the serve! soot ION the shut tle ( As soon .is the shut tie crosses t he net 1). As soon as On retener tontot ts the shuttle 17 A linesman sv the 51011ile tall dose to the line and tolls "(int" and then decides tinshuttle hit the lineWhat is the propet action"' A. I mcsinon should sav nothing as site has aheadv made het gall 13. I !IP:SIMI!" NIP qII(I dillto see who sins the nest Iall'. And then Chance her tall ( I mesman should toilet( the tall 6, loic the nest serge I) 1 mesman should never t }hinge .1 mite it is made

Is What is the lust notation made on a state sheet in.1 dotthlts molt If' A. Blat Is-Smith 0 BiovvnJoncs 172 OGWS TENNISGADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE B BLit k-Snnt Birmn-Joncs! ( Black South/ 0 Bro%kn-Jones; D. Blatk-Smit hi 0 Brom. n-Jones; I9 A r4.1.1 Cr on !earn A serv.s out ot turntier team w.ins the rally and thenI he mistake isdist. o ered bet oret heire \I sere is made What is the umpne's decision'' A I'la)ersOile.I position, point stands B Nay en or Wit positron, "1:1 is dl'. Lured (. \ ens du not korrekt position, pl,)Int stands I) Play Cr. do 1101..orieri position. point is hot ..used. loss of sere icsults

.21) the It k CI% Cr 55.15 not looking at her opponent %%hen the %el-% cr hit a q 11 It L. sineI he umpire ay.,arden a pointhowoer, the let COX!" il.ums she w.as notreadylor the serAe What is the ision" A. Sei 'lutes a point reteRei must play the shuttle %%hen sered

B Server loses sep.ne. it15 .1 1.1011 lo serve beton opponent has opportunity to get read!. C Set-, repeated, Ns het her re( C11.er ;mg at sersed sh.ittle or 1101 I)Segel stoles .11,o111111 lel et% et 55% ung shuttl.: as she is konsidk led to he read

2. I I he 111111111V .ails a hull against Player B ss ho does not agree W..111 111C (let 111011 and appeals tin.a!!What is the «rued plot ed e A I he appeal is ignored as Itis konsidercd unsportsmanlike to (uk.shon the (all ut an umpire B I he appeal is noted. the remainder of the game played. the referee is onsulied to determine %%I to k orreel I heunntliie dekisionmust he made het ore the nest seriteIIitis 41 question of LOA, ihr Icterce shOUld I. 1.011stIlftd I) An .111(1111011,11 p°1111is ill\ ell Ph,. CI A for Ws inteiteienke w.ith the kali 11 During afallythe reLeRer;'skis11(iankle andfallsShe legIle111 Pe11111551011 10 disk 01111101C play long enough to hose the ankle taped What is the dekision, A.Play coin nitres B I he CC must he k sq,sulted belotk play is suspended

FM:WINTON STUDY QUESTIONS 173 C.1 he ser%Ke court lodge must be consulted hetore playis suspended I) The umpue suspends pl.i' 23Willa of I mat should instinct the linesman and service (mut Bulge of their duties'' A Reteree B. umpire C. InstruLtions unneLessaly I) 1 ether the referee or (npile 24What instill( ttons should thL umpne gRe the play ers ieg.irding (ailing "no Shots.. (haring a mat( II) \ Fell PI.1 CIS tern! is used only by the uniime B Ask the players to Lail all "no shots. C. Ask the players to call "no shots" missed by the imps: 1) Ask the players //,/! to ....111 "no shots

PART II

Directions I auk of the following statements presents a situation %%hick %%Mild require one ofthe,iecisionslistedbeim+ Assume no "htions exist other that-, those staledI cam A 1, alm.ay s seising leam 13 is aN.ay s reels mg A. Point C Second seRk B. I el I) Side out

1 During a doubles game, seLond sen.n.. the serer hits a long seise 1.eiy(lose to the hack boundary line1 he teLeRer steps outside the (owl to play the shuttle Mu: hits the shut,le into the net and then indkates to the UP pire that She should %%III the rally be( ause the snuffle muis going out-ot-bounds What is the umpire's del INIOII9 the server's partner stands in the same (curt as the wirer, secondsel % lie I he reLeiver's returntipsthenet and Calls out -of- hounds What is I he (lei 'mon' On the lust serve of a doubles game the shuttle lands in the hack alleyWhat is the umpire's decision' 1 he s' long playa on doubles team A seises lust in th,. second inning of a game !cam 13 (.(snot get to the shuttle during the tally and the falls on the line What Is the correct de( ision'' C I he sep.er in a singles game hits the shut Ile out o", fur 11,111(1I he hand holding the shuttle is lust above he/ wa 0,I he leceivel hits the shuttle into the net What is the (le( ision ' 174 DGWS TENNIS.BADMINTONSOI I...S/-1 GUIDE t) Itisthe second Inning, lust see ice of a doubles game The serer mars a take but at the shuttle and then hits a short serve During tat rally a play er on the serving team wings Ind misses a shuttle that goes out-ot-bounds What is the &Limon' 7 Duting a rally in a singles game the serer lets her racket folloL I'M/Ugh over Ole net and her opponent's racket hits the net as she is try mg to play the shuttle What is the deLision) On the first serve 01 doubles game the shuttle teasels dose to the center line so the play er in the Lett serAice court returns the shuttle The serving team lets the shuttle fall to the floor in then court What is the decision'' Player A slides her toot tomard as she setes the shuttle mu a singles game. The recmet, ss io was standing on the center s,'TAIL'e line hen the carer hits the shuttle quickly rettuns the shuttle to Player As court What is the derision'' 10'I eam A is sermg in a doubles game. second seD, ILA'I he server's racket Just barely' contacts the feathers but gars the shuttle no forward moement. What is the dekision 11 During the tallyfollowing their tint sendk e. tram A hits the shuttle andit strikes the net and talk to the ground on beam A's sideIn anticipation of returning a smash. Team B rushes toward the nettans ott balance and then hits the net with the racket What is the &Liston' 1 2 In exekuting a smash, singles player A tall, into the supports 01 the net it bout touching the netIler opponent, the feLel% el% is unable to return the smash What is the action of the of f 13 Ina doubles game, firstsersiee. play er A slings the shuttle dining a tallyPlayer B returns the shuttle, hitting it on the shalt of the racket as she does Player A tails to return the ,huttle What is the desision of the of 1 ILIA') 14,Ina doubles match. Team Ais ,wing. second servike. A member of learn A Lontakts the shuttle %%It h :he outer edge (i1 het racket. causing the shuttle to cross the net and land in Feam B's Iley What is the dekision of the officiall

concerning these study (B1011011, should be curetted to the Badminton\animations and Ratings Chair- man.

Jeanette Wieser Sam Houston State University Iluntsville. Texas 77340 BADMINTON STUDY QUESTIONS 175 ANSWERS AND RULE REFERENCES PART I Ansv.er Rule Reference

1 B I ass 7 ( lass 11 A I ass 5L 4 1) I ass1 la Ieiii of Oft., the Mat ^, ass IS 7 13 tech of OffDuties of Ref 4 S I) Iass 9 B Ieih of Off , Calling the Match, ( I_ ass 17

1 I) ec h of Oft , Scoring the Match I) I ea of Oft , Seoting the I1latch 1) 1 ea of Oft, Duties of Limp , .21 4 A itch of 011 , Stormg the Match Lech of Off , interp 0 B Lass 91) 7 C lea of Ott , Dunes of I in S B Law S 9 B Lass,1 2 _0 1) Lass' 15 21 C Law 21 Lass 22L "B Itof Ott , Duties of (tm!).15 , I) let h of OftDuties of limp ..:33

PART II Answer Rule Reference

1 A Lass4 2 A Lass 5 3 law ( 4 B Law 5 1) Law 6. C Law4d 7 A Law4f, g 8 A Law0 9 B Law7 10 D Law H C mr-19I 12 D Law4i 13. C Law4h 14 A Law4_01ot prolubtted in rules) 176 DGWS TENNISBADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE

fastened 55itli to 2' z Mile, spread atthe top and shall he tnmly thread ut of her suit ablematerial Subject to there helm: nosubstanthil salia!ion in thegeneral Hight of the shuttle, moddicationsto the design, pace, sseight, and applosal of the chose speutications 111.1,he made, subject to the national otganiration concernedfa) in places whereatmospheric altitude of climate, makethe standard conditions, due either to %%Inch make it shuttle unsuitable, .)rh) it specialit umstances exist of the game. others% Ise expedient in the interests pia} el \ shuttle shall be deemed tohe of coneet poce if, %%hen a slakes it ssith a full underhandstroke ftoin a ofisciage strength back boundary line in a lineparallel ti spot nninechatel%, abuse one foot and ,,fit .1" ,,p ird mph'it falls not les, than I 1 I Trri-1,1,t in TECHNIQUES OF nrFICIATING BADMINTON

BADMINTGN SUBCPMMITTEE Principles and Techniques of Officiating C rnmittee

DUTIES OF THE r6cFEREE

Ineach tournament the than 01tommitteeint. hange shallappointa!deice totofor themin mks ,«)iing and iegulating pl

The referee shall-

I - 11eu>(omplete thargeof mathpl,o, e \,ept tor th( s(heduling of tin. time and plate 01r iatt he 2 lie thoroughly tannhar with mkt entortehe ()lima! law \ of 1)...Inunton and the interpretations w hit h art a pal t rt the laws 3II,Retht.ant hontand tesponsibilitto idpoint and remot( umpir(s Ime\men and \LIto iudg(s 4 Se(111..1 the p1.0 mg .11(.1in. tsp >st, \(t. , meet the r(quitenkno..at the law \ 14( tinfinal aurnont) onipn, al horn Hi( d«ision of ii ire withauthouh, te),( fseHa um pin'sd( t Non inl,,(1%ing a point of law onlyI he \«)ting ofa mat, h tan he alik-Litd old\itIlk appeal I)( made to the ref rte betot( flu ne \sertte tdeli\ er(d

13e piesent to so,ailahle at the pia% mg 1 atall (tintsdonna or bespeol((all.It piOlt.nt,A1 b.a &piny apponn,d 11±, Min

DUTIES OF THE UMPIRE I he umpire ha\ time main tisp(m\lbilit /(( ottR rut( it mat,- h Itsr I, to litIA the math with 1 spet tat anti to son/ the nmattli

The umpire shall-

1 litoroughl know tik law \ ()t badminton havethe final de,,ision on all point \ of lath\ pia\ .r 111.1 hCMC, 1, appeal .o the teleice On a point of LIM, (Mk 3 Retoginie tht linesman \ de( noon aanal on all point \ rt Litt On hi\ own line1 he umpire tannot oeinale him It a hne \man unkaghted, the tonna( 11,a then givea (1,0ion ofh.tan ()them) \e a let shout(' t e pla) id TECHNIQUES OF OFFICIATING BADMINTON 177

4, Re..oginre a sense lodge's lie1111011 .anal on all points of 1.1,1 ui,iinn,,(lon the delierN 1)1 the serf lie as set out in 1/4>ei,ILe ( owl Judge 2 I he nini,n, is r, spon,Mle tot ,alling the 's1 atilt, the ,tote distimtli and loud]} enough to he hoard ,leaii lit rs and speoatois promptland tutu auiliont It a mistake is made admit ita('otogue, and torrett tt 6St ore the mats h and retard points on a ,till. Pad k point ed lust mark the score, then see that the sets Change, LOUTIS and Mint/141k estore Isennethe nest serh.eIII the umpire possesses less than a 1)(iWS Natnmal halm- shit ma) ask the ser% 1,e owl' fudge to keep a duplit ate store ) Nett r ask ,pert, orabout a derision 01 lit intluemed h:. their remarksIt atit t ishinLartn,itheIt Idled aleishould he its AI tied s 1k itsponsii.ieoralllints not ed 1):. linesmen tit al all Pusslhleone person should he assigned tolinesW.111,11 nit umpire is not in a la\ able position to se r I h.i.Lontiol the that, h %%Allow hieing on!, ions Keep pla !lotting is ithout InteiniPtiOnS «bile enSUflrl" that the lasts Mt uh .erredI he rame is to, tine 10 \li iv,the ;game to Pt 0 ed. anti do notall d hurt' 1)111 d (h)(11.0.11 !Ws in the mind oflintumpire of indqe as to

%%Mt tier an intringemi. hi of the lasts has o, sun, d 1 I he pla CI hent ill of the tiCtIsl, ) II Be.,sox judge of an. susp, )1 and base Iislight to diskp 110 an of mender for leasing tin,t oust ut delis trig the gam, II use 12 In line abswk.eit.1 talent appoint linesink n and sem,e111(4,, at Iiisdtstittinn

Before the Match

] 1 Obtain the suite padI font tin,retireeI rtfI p',sti s ptMolt and ic,co.ci and s,o.et on the sLore,aid 14 the net for height See that the posts ate on Ili, !mes and that tapes are toriettiHai ed 11 .1s 2 and .11 ISI noire that the hoc \men trod ,trine fudges al, torrent) rod klloV, theft hills (see I inesnien and 1/4>C1lt. ( 01)11 Jinn:A.1 that a stint, lent ilt1,11110 of testis shuttles ta,tording to I ay, 4) is tin the inatelt in cutlet to atom klela slur ne pia)If the pl,r Cis Lannot agree timpue should hair the shuttles testedina foutnament, she should reset torlit refereein a matt 11. the taplains sir Iehelt'e 016shuttles Batt been found to he hAkplahlv, co,.11et hat tie. arc rased Unil11 Ir 0.111111 d110. 178 DGWS TENNISBADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE I \N %(,%\ onthindti on tot13.idnnnton 1tb,cri, L,10),.1No\ 1969 c, \I II II \\NI ( "It'LIIIIIittletut\ dlatl,c(113.1,1minton St tRICIIIN lt',S (;t11,1( I 960-1,)(0) ()ON, \IIt)N "Iunclaniental Prinople, of \to% einent1pplied to Badminton/)(, ICS I < nnn-lladmmt,m(,rode. 196619hs \MI II RSON, Iit \ \( 1 S 1 "13adnunton-1 emit.1 ran.ition /)(, ICSI enms-IlatInunron 1964-1()(th 13 .1,tindmm.1.,1 13,,dininton 01)1 \I _Sc ( oa, N 19().4 R1(,1)1 NJI \N BetI ootI oi,ird Dr;It'SInn is-B(1,1m; t'm (,10,1(.196.2-196-1 R0131\ S()\ RI( "Ioatlung the Dif I crew13egnmetin Badminton I)(,It'S I t (;uhl( ws-19-0 IZONI_ 1NDS, J1 ANN! 1 "SituationalAv.areness('.init 13L- Iaught ''" /)(;It'.SI(unn-llatimm ton(;tade1()64-1.966 IA: 0E4 II II-13.R111111111 on Diilk I oil, to ,/,wria/ Fet, Hu);

Tournaments and Officiating Imett«zo lladrrunt,,,tI sso, talon U11t

SELECTED BADMINTON BIBLIOGRAPHY 165

starting theMatch- nstilo !hid(1,)...ing I, ,)11cLII oil' and that the v.itineP, ot I \erL.Ise t heir options snide! I ay. 6 ISStark oilt heSlOrr pad tot closable, the names oft hlAlas et, ,1,1(tIng In tilllight fund WI% 0)1111 \ /' that, to hi' ;MidiItAli%tittle to NIT \Ohl tit u.plaNcrs di&IIItheir ,,oste,,tset %he otitts1)ttimg 11 Inc git that v.ii,ng ionth unnollo No that thus base tic St ,/ 111l1l! (1alN, -..,otc di iOlitillgt

During the Match I',Sec that no Linn( dela ot thatt ticpia;&r,do Not Selected BadmintonVisual Aids Revised by

LYNN CARPENTER Eau Gallie High School Melbourne, Florida MARILYN PARRISH Tillamook High School Tillamook, Oregon

Pities listed are stalk:it to 1.11,Inge.Numbers in parentheses meter eNt.ellent, VG to film distributors listedf valuation of films 1 ter!, good. G good

16 mm Films Ill 1 nglan,/ World ChampionshipSingles 1 ingls 60 nun . 106' sd Rental S2 5 (1)I \citing final mat( 11heft% cen Mr,steady Ilashman (USA) andMiss Noriko lakagi (Japan)bilm us accompanied b3, a shout smilerpreface desmbing the points of special interest 'o loot for ,nhe tilin Badminton /undainentaissd b(k..\\ .(4),1 tindamental and rules of badminton demonstratedbt evert and nose players Wm to seise, forehand andbackhand shots, and other impoi hint play mg teLlmiques. G. / u zng I (wale's.10 min., h&ss(3) A regulation) men s singles game of badminton bet \\cellt wo top-ranked plotessional pia> els, Andre I3,nmh keeps score and hen \ idson and 1hughForgie gRes funning LominentsLomerning strokes used,loom oikind strategy. Some truck shotsG. / undathenta/t 01 Badminton 12 nun ,sd., b &ss. Sale SOO, RentalS5 13.Pearson, Uinserso of ( o day s) ( ) Producer, George Alabama. 1 etiumal Advisor,Jim PooleBasic tundan.entals of 01 the outstandmg player, Nonunion are demonstrated by some lett-handed in the U.S. Skills aredemonstrated b, both right- and play ers rn slot' motion and atregular speed. Also included ate actual game situations\\ ith emphasis on strategyfor singles, doubles, and nu \ ed doubles G. ())ken 1947. I sd., Let'sPhilBadminton, and demonstrates Da\ idsone plains the game toataind) necessary skills. 'I he himincludes singles and doubles courts, net height, description of equipment,basic rules, grips, folehand and GUIDE 166 DGWS TENNIS-BADMINTON-SQUASH

See that lie 0) "setting- IS lot ro..11 e \cruse(' ( I am. 7 ) See that the p1.1> ers change ends tollo\\ mg each game and at the correct score in the third game (I a 8) See that the m.inning side series test Watch ton a player interteting with the correct speed of the shuttle1 he ,lay et should be warned, and the shuttle discarded ft IleieSsill On no account a11oN play ers to calfno shot.'" -tank,"Lair> , el. M.,1111 them if do, as it may distiakt their opponents On 110 occasion should the umpire use the terms "no shot- -tour or use ine tern, "fault Pro \ ide for the Lorre( tinters al bet \G:t. 11 the se, ond and the thud gainertshere,illoNed V, hen a linesman calls "Out,- or the shuttle talls outsidea line forylnc., the umpire is hitasolt responsiblecallouthoole calling the score 7 When the option to set occur ...ash the player'', 01players; decision. Announce the deci,.on loudly so that spekta)n can hear, calling "set 2 points... or 3 or 5as appropriate by "love-all

At the End of the Game

yt Announce "game to ." (the namelsl 01 the planer).) in 41 tournament or the name or the team representAlin the caseof a meeting of rc :,resent alive t Cants) tollosed by t he stoic winner's score 1.,tand, it appropriate, by "on( game all In the case of a match in a meeting between two learns always definet he contestants bythe names oftheact aal play ers the event of set games, announce the total game points. I 2-9. 18-13 10 At the end of he match announce "game al d match to (the mllets) 01 the wintierls1 and all scores)

Scoring the Match "1 he contestants' name should be entered on flu horliontallute 01 the scorecard A vertical tine drawn through both scoring columns malt atts servo" over At the beginning of a side's term 01 service th(ue .(ore 5110111(1 he Limed over and riotedI %ampleI he -0" ml the second "5" in part 4 in the singles scoring given below. In r 'vand to setting, the decision not to setis indicated by writing "no set- on the scoreshect at the point where the sett!:gpossibility occurs (see In setting. I On a decision to set, draw a vertical line thiough theswung column of the serving team and write 'he option on the scoresheet where the setting possilnlit, ()Lairs A double vertical line is drawn through both storing columns and the final score entered to the rightit the scorecard when the game is ended (sec Ir. setting 2)

In singles:

1. 1 _ Jones,' 0 I2 3 4 $, Jones seixes and makes a- _ c points, 1; n Smith/ 1

T:CliN1OUES OF °MCl/. IN; 13A0,1INT._)N 181 _lone.' 0 12; 45 j .lone, lu,r, the ..,erse. Snot h I_ 0

_ Smith 2 point. Jone, 0 123 4. f then Smith, o I2 1 4 Joie, O 123 45 Smith lu,e, the.,CI-1e Smith. 0 12 I-

In doubles: the Inlil.tl ,etAer lot each team he hted tint lo indicate the completion of one ,erlice, Way,. MAC Mound the 1,1,1 point (number) made the to,,t seder I 111 coin Llearl de.ognate the point at lcbich the .>eLond begins het ter m 01

nutIt-lone,conr- -A)2 3I iiienle lel%mg, viti 3 point,.Jilt] Reed -Brown IOWthe wise Reed 1.,.,,v,n v, in SiimhJone,(Ip1 2;I 2 point, dile; oh- ' 0 12 taming the ,-.erN.e Reed-Rwv,I. _.i _ Reed-B),,-,..nhim.' f--. 1 -, ,--"1 .ioilli-lone,,0)). _ . i the i _>'n, (.(...ind NCIe. Reed-Blown, I 0h© I R -:t1-13ims11 1111 Snot h- lon-e-- 2; ; mote point., ...._ ...... _ ___ f Reed-1Sr.' n i) Ir..:)I4 i

In cetting.

I

1 ; lc M-Broksn 0)12 1; 14 Set

182 DCDr wS T...1,41.1S-BADMIN:3411.1_.'1QUIIIPen .:..."-1.1CtiEle

,__I Smith-Jones hae option to set at13-all. decide not to set.HOst.IIS it t.1111-t. 111 seflers sone of I?I he), stoic a point. then lose the sere Set 3 Snuth-Jones 10 1I4 2 1[1 o Reed-131( mill 1 3 14 '

Smitb-Jones m,n) a point and ',meIsI kill. Reed-B10 11,\e option 10 seand set 3.I his is %%Intel] Acne t it server's turret)!store 114' and a lineisdrvtn throutth the sert.mg team's (Smith-Jones)storing Column. Further storing s'aits at 1. cit.

DUTIES OF THE SERVICE COURT JUDGE Theservicecourt judge shall

: So on a km than ),the net post (pr,terably opposite thet.orn t from the umpire) and on the same side of the net as f heumpire, itt lit tunst,intes pei nut. 213e responsible lot seeing thatthe serer, at the moment of striking the shuttle a. Dots 1101 11.1%e any pail O( tilt head of the racket aboveany part of the hard holding the tat }set avt 14a I b Does not have the shuttle above his waist 11 at% 1.4a1 Ilas both feet in a stationaly position on the floor insole the Nen ke Louit (I at I( ) d. Does not !elm (1.m I4d Interpretation I). IIthe serer doo. not ,otnyt,vIf h all the points in item 2 above, the sets ite judge should immediately tali fault.loudly. and ensure thatthe untrue hears him ,Vote I he unipnt watches the receiver. 4.,Nssisl it: keeping store is necessary.

DUTIES OF THE ROVING SERVICE JUDGE The roving service judge shall

I Wearan arm hand of lecogintable badge. 2. Move among the Courts observing thesemLes did' are being exetuted in each matt 1 3.Position himsell by the net post ofany matt!) in %%Inch service /atiltmay be tit.t.uri mg. 4. Upon obseiving a seo,ke fault talla letIle will (lvii vtarn the server and explain the nature of the fault. 5.IIthe serve) 11 c1lleS11011falls to toulply with alegal seiVe (Duties il Si %Le Court Judge. item 21. (lie:ming seIVIte lunge shall Lai a "laud TECHNIQUES OF OFFICIATING BADMINTON 183 DUTIES OF THE LINESMEN The linesmen shall-

1 Sit c haus ,n prolongation of their hues, .111 11e ends 01tl e k.OtItt .1110 .11 the side oppostle theumpire. I ash he entirely responsible for hislineIt the slitit.',e tans out, no matter hov,1,11 tail "out'' inoMpti) ttl deaf. loud 1.010e I he kdtt st, ,old tennorced by a hand motionandi twin the courtItthe shuttle fallsin, so nothing. It unsighted, inform the umpne immediately byplacing his hands mei hiseyes. %,ittNotice %%here the cork of theshuttlecock lands in making .1 decision \ HA-angled shuttlecockMaybe out although the feahers ate well inside thecoin t hue. Also, watch the line, not the shuttle In watching.1 he lost 1110%111g °Ilea, a stationaty one may NI the last indication that theshuttle may strike ti.d! )(nu line. switch your pie tioni theshuttle to the sued schLie you espect it to land. 3'::eLer make L..11until the -huttle has actual!) giound outside the court strut: 4It the cork touches any gait of theline,itis in decision Change a L.:hem:Leinecessaryby %owingitbeloie set% ice. rise nest 5.if three linesmenare aLailable, two should take a hack boundai line and in.oublesi long service line each. thethird, the side linestart hestfromtheumpire.itadditional linesmen arL .w.o'able,theyshould be used accordingto preference. the umpue's

INTERPRETATIONS When an umpire is officiating. thelaws of badminton shall be enforced h.loinIn the absence c..,n umpire the players concerned shall carry out the laws..frd tf a violation he claimed by one side and not acknowledged 1),. the 311), r,.1bet shah he allowedUmplies are lecommendedfor al, semifinal or final in it Lhes in any championship Inj Men 2 In ludo to eliminate ',Mkt: Wilts in the early roundstutor to the semi! mals of quaiter-fmals,a qualified service fudge may, he provided to act asa ming seiviee fudge. He should he provided %%fill an arm hand or recognitablebadge, and the player,: should he informed of his presence. 111,,duty will he to position himself by the net post of a mat .11in question, And on observinga service fault call .1letthe will then warn theserver and explain the nature of the ;atiltIIthe server continue, to serye the loving seiice fudge shall commit an `ci ices call a fault on the 184 IDGWS TENNIS,BADMINTONSQUASHGUIDE 3 I1 the reCen,:ris!Milled for nuc ing betoretheserf lieis dCh% el-C(101tot not being in the correct sets. ice count tse,. I() .o 14L,rid at the same time the safer is also faulted for a seRILe intring,ement (see Laws 14a, c, h, or in) it shah he a : II any player leMts or intentional)balks his opponent, etc :, before the deli% ely of the ser% lie (see LIV. 2.4(1 ) the fault should be retarded agr nisi the play ei concerned. 4, Senile toot taults Clarification of Law lb. a Anylorwardstepalindictfoot,of a113, Otherfoot mofement, must be completed and both feet much reath st,lticmary pOsItIon On the 1100r prior 10 the start ot racket motion to sere''Start tar,itket motion include,' the batkswing. b. Vail 1_a v lb reads ''sonic mitt of both feet of these play ers must remain inLOIltaLlvIldi the groundina slaltonatypositiontillthe semfeIsdelneled I he following three questions were asked and ithas been tided that the paints raised do not constitute a breath of the law Accordingly,players shouldnt,tbefaultedforthese it (ions 11) Does this Mean that the same part ofalootmist iemaiii hn canton with the ground, ol ...mild itbe a dilteteni part of the same toot' 2)It the back loot of a serer .tarts with Ilk toe and heel in Lomat' with the ground and rises onto the toe as the senile is strut's, with the heel rising stra,!ght, this in order" ,3) On the other hand, ifthe heel Lome, oft the ground and swnels through an angle of00 degtetsts Irequent'y done. %Omit means that the part of the toe iemanungillf ontact with the ground swnels and mows, is this collect c. Serf ife terminologyI aw 14(1 states "II betore of during the deli% ery, at the seance, iny payel makes,' plehnunaly feints 01 otherwise balks his opponentitis a Ludt Webster's Second Inteinational Ihtronar (Riffles the terms rein!" and balk as trim Is,'11 assumed o, tatse appearante a :%10(.k blow of attack,and ''a balk .s.1 tadule of a ....mpelitor to rump, faint, or the 11F( , Ate' taktug a preliminary . I he senile may be regarded as started when both players haw taken stationary positions readm:ss to sere and to teterfe, Flom that Nail until the shuttle is struck by the serer, 1 aft1 4d applies,\ ,,lotion to be considered a hunt or balk must hat e some element of deception if must not be some t harattetistit motion that has 110 purpose and does not deit'INX the It Cel%

TECHNIQUZS OF OFFICIATING BADMINTON 185 6.( ailingLudt}hitsSlotsmottoo hale sl)on that piaLtkall), all skitplt hit shuttles strike the raeket Mike. The torts hits the raact. then the shuttle glottal: teserses ends. and the leathers blush the gutis the shuttle lea%es the tadset.I he !notion 3s so last that It seems to be a single hitIt is important tor the umpiR to RLognite th,::illegalhits are amatterof degree and ludgment .tild to tut: tue hitter the henetit of the 10121)1

Lett Amen, u, iiial1110101) r, t nnunends tun 131111 !III M.b,..11 differ Irr,m liltO....ZVI!! k if 0.'41 OMIYifin ii at the

of 3 %Ilk ,ertgc III Jnul ls, and ask larfl of alit 4.0 that II is plated olk r poll 011(1 fill. ifw tfi in Itart.1r illier than onel Ills( tilt tu,t 11,1111 186 DGWS TENNIS-DADMINTO 4SQUASH GUIDE LAWS OF BADMINTON* isad,IM«1 It; the Ittletttattitthal IiiisI Ittamt bede,,Ittett and the Amcruan Ifadtn,ntr)n;it

*c op) lighted I)). the") merit an \ Latino!reprinted Ii)per I ission LAWS OF BADMINTON 187 20.- 0"

I' - 6" 6" 6" I'- 6"

BACK BOUNDARY LINE

DOUBLESalEti SERVICE SERVICE COUR T COO= /7 ." V).6 RIGHT V EF w;la -1 SERVICE SERVICE- CO COURT -COUR O0, SHORT SERVICE LINE

W w o' Z NET 1 >- cr O

O co O

Zs;an

Dtagrum A

188 JEWS TENNISBAOMINTONSQUASH GUIDE 0"

BTL3 L E S =SERVI-CrE_ co sCOURT----=' t -fo 1:RIGHT--=4LEFT ESERVICE=----SERVICE 1JR---COURT SHORT SERVICE LINE --c

-(o -1 _,NET-- .a.

zW _,

fx W z1- 0W

Diagram B

LAWS OF BADMINTON 189 (c) A side rejecting the option of "setting" at the firstoppor- tunity shall not be thereby debarred from "setting" if a second opportunity arises. (d) In handicap games, "setting" is not permitted. 8. The opposing sides shall contest the best of three games, unless otherwise agreed. The players shall change ends at the commence- ment of the second game and also of the third game, if any. In the third game, the players shall change ends when the leading score reaches (a) 8 in a game of 15 points, (b) 6 in a game of 11 points, (c)11 in a game of 21 points, or in handicap events when one of the sides has scored half the total number of points required to win the game (the next highest numbei being taken in the case of fractions). When it has been agreed to play only one game, the players shall change ends as provided above for the third game. lf, inadvertently, the players omit to change ends as provided in thisLaw atthescoreindicated,the ends shallbe changed immediately the mistake is discovered, and the existing score shall stand. 9. Doubles Play.(a) It having been decided which side is to have the first service, the player in the right-hand service court of that side commences the game by serving to the player in the service court diagonally oppotte, If the latter player returns the shuttle before it touches the ground, it is to be returned by one of the "in" side, and then returned by one of the "out" side, and so on, till a fault is made or the shuttle ceases to be "in play" (see paragraph b), If a fault is made by the "in" side, their right to continue serving is lost, as only one player on the side beginning a game is entitled to do so (see Law 11), and the opponent in the right-hand service court then becomes the server: but if the service is not returned or the fault is made by the "out" side, the "in" side scores a point. The "in" side players then change from one service court to the other, the service now being from the left-hand service court to the player in the service court diagonally opposite. So long as a side remains "in," service is delivered alternately from each service court into the one diagonally opposite, the change being made by the "in" side when, and only when, a point is added to its score. (b) Thefirst serviceof a side in each inning shall be made from the right-hand service court. A service is delivered as soon as the shuttle is struck by the server's racket, The shuttle is thereafter in play until it touches the ground or until a fault or let occurs, or except as provided in Law 19. After the service is delivered, the server and the player served to may take up any position they choose on their side of the net, irrespective of any boundary lines, LAWS OF BADMINTON 191 10. The player served to may alone receive the service, but should the shuttle touch or be struck by his partner, the "In" side scoresa point. No player n,a:receive two consecutive services in the same game, except as provided in Law 12. 11. Only on, player of the side beginning a game shall be entitled to serve in its first I, I Digs. In all subsequent Innings, each partner shall have the rigl t, and they shall serve consecutively. The side winning a game shall always serve first in the next game, but either of the winners may serve and either of the losers may receive the service. 12.If a player serves out of turn or from the wrong service court (owing to a mistake as to the service court from which service is, at the time being, in order),and his side wins the rally,it shall be a let, provided that such let be claimed and allowed or ordered by the umpire h' fore the next succeeding service is delivered. If a player of the "out" side standing in the wrong service court is prepared to receive the service when it is delivered, and his side wins the rally, it shall be a "let," provided that such "let" be claimed and allowed, or ordered by the umpire, before the next succeeding service is delivered. If in either of the above cases, the side at fault loses the rally, the mistake shall stand and the players' position shall not be corrected. Should a player inadvertently change sideswhen he should not do so and the mistake not be discovered until after the next succeeding service has been delivered, the mistake shall stand, and a let cannot be claimed or allowed, and the players' position shall not be corrected. 13. Singles Play. Doubles Laws 9 to 12 hold good except that (a) The players shall serve from and receive service in their respective right-hand service courts only when the server's score is 0 or an even number of points in the game, the service being delivered from and received in their respective left-hand service courts when the server's score is an odd number of points. tbi Both players shall change service courts after each point has been scored. 14. Faults. A fault made by a player of the side which is "in" puts the server out; if made by a player whose side is "out," it countsa point to the "in" side. It is a fault- (a) If in serving, the shuttle at the instant of being struck be higher than the server's waist, or if any part of the head of the racket, at the instant of striking the shuttle, be higher thanany part of the server's hand holding the racket. (b) If in serving, the shuttle falls into the wrong service court (i.e.. into the one not diagonally opposite to the server),or falls short of the short service line, or beyond the long service line, or 192 DGIAIS TENNISBADMINTON-SQUASH GUIDE 5 outside the side boundary lines of the service court into which service is in order. (c)If the server's feet are not in the service court from which service is at the time being in order, or if the feet of the player receiving the service are not in the service court diagonally opposite until the service is delivered (see Law 16). (d) If before or during the delivery of the service any player makes preliminaryfeintsorotherwiseintentionallybalkshis opponent. (e) If eitherinservice or play the shuttlefalls outside the boundaries of the court, or passes through or under the net, or fails to pass the net, or touches the roof or side walls or the person or dress of a player. (A shuttle falling on a line shall be deemed to have falleninthe courtor service courts of which such lineisa boundary.) (f)If the shuttleinplay be struck beforeitcrosses to the striker's side of the net. (The striker may, however, follow the shuttle over the net with his racket in the course of his stroke.) (g)If when the shuttle is in play a player touches the netor its supports with racket, person, or dress. (h) If the shuttle be held on the racket (i.e. caught or slung during the execution of a stroke); or if the shuttle be hit twicein succession by the same player with two strokes; or if the shuttle be hit by a player and his partner successively. (i)Ifin play a player strikes the shuttle (unless he thereby makes a good return), or is struck by it, whether he is standing within or outside the boundaries of the court. (j)If a player obstructs an oppooent. (k)If Law 16 be transgressed. It is not a fault if the shuttle be hit by the frame, shaft,or handle of the racket, or if the base and the feathers of the shuttle be struck simultaneously. General 15. The server may not serve till his opponent is ready, but the opponent shall be deemed to be ready if a return of the service is attempted. 16. The server and the player served to must stand within the limits of their respective service courts (as bounded by the short and long service lines, the center lines and the sidelines), and some part of both feet of these players must remain in contact with the surface of the court in a stationary position until the serviceis delivered. A foot on or touching a line in the case of either theserver or the received shall be held to be outside his service court (see Law 14c). The .espective partners may take up any position, provided they do no' unsight or otherwise obstruct an opponent. ...;.,:-.s OF BADMINTON 193 17If m the course of service or rally the shuttle touches and passes (P'er the net. the stroke is Pot invalidated thereby. It is a good return if the shuttle, having passed outside either post, drops on or within t :e boundary lines of the opposite court. A let may be given by the umpire for an unforeseen or accidental hindrance. If in st .vice or during a rally, a shuttle,alter passing over the net. is caught m or on the net, it is a let. When a let occurs, the play since the last se :ice shall not count and the player who served shall serve again. If the receiver is faulted for moving before the service is delivered, or for not being within the correct service court, in accordance with Laws 14 (c) or 16. and at the same time the server is also faulted for a service infringement, it shall be a "let." 18. If the sewer, in attempting to serve, misses the shuttle, itis not a fault: but if the shuttle be touched by the racket, a service is thereby delivered 19. If when inplay the shuttle strikes the net and remains suspended there, or strikes the net and falls towards the surface of the court on the striker's side of the net, or hits the surface outside the court and an opponent then touches the netr shuttle with his racket or person, there is no penalty, as the shuttle is notthenin play. 20. If a player has a chance of striking the shuttle in a downward direction when quite near the net, his opponent must not put up his racket near the net on the chance of the shuttle rebounding from it. This is obstruction within the meaning of Law 14j. A player may, however, hold up his racket to protect his face from being hit if he does not thereby balk his opponent. 21. It shall be the duty of the umpire to call fault or let should either occur, with appeal being made by the players, and to give his decision on any appeal regarding a point in dispute if made before the next service. The umpire's decision shall be final, but he shall uphold the decision of a linesman or service judge. This does not preclude the umpire also from faulting the server or receiver. Where, however, a referee is appointed, an appeal shall lie to him from the decision of an umpire on question of law only. In the absence of a referee, it shall be the duty of the umpire to appoint linesmen and service judges at his discretion. 22. Continuous Play. Play shall be continuous from the first service until the match is concluded except that (a) In the International Badminton Championships, there. shall be allowed an interval not exceeding five minutes bet ween the second and third games of a match, (b) In countries where climatic conditions render it desirAle, there shall be allowed, subject to the previously published approval 194 DGWS TENNIS-BADMINTON-SQUASH GUIDE of the nation'I organizationconcerned, an interval not exceeding five minutes between the secondand third games of a match. in singles or doubles or both. (c) When necessitated bycircumstances not within the controI of the players, the umpiremay suspend play for such a periodas he may consider necessary. If play is suspended,the existing score shall stand and play he resumed from thispoint. Under no circumstances shall play be suspended to enablea player to recover his strength or wind. or to receive instructionor advice. No player shall be allowed to leave the court until the matchis concluded without the umpire's consent. The umpire shall be the solejudge of any suspension of play, and he shall have the rightto disqualify an offender.

INTERPRETATIONS 1. Any movement or conduct bytie server that has the effect of breaking the continuity of service afterthe server and receiver have taker. then positions toserve and to receive the service is a preliminary feint (see Law I4d). 1. Itis obstruction if a player invadesan opponent's court with racket or person in any degreeexcept as permitted in Law 14f (see Law 14j). 3. Where necessary on account ofthe structure of a building, the local badminton authoritymay, subject to the right of veto by its national organization. make bylawsdealing with cases in which a shuttle touches an obstruction. 4. It is a fault under Law 14h ifthe shuttle be hit otherwise than by one impact with the racket. But itis not a fault (provided the stroke be otherwise legitimate) (a) ifthe base and feathers of the shuttle he struck simultaneouslyor (b) if the shuttle be struck with one distinct hit only byany part of the racket

CLARIFICATION OF RULES OGWS Badminton Co mmittee Law 12, Paragraph 1,Serving out of turn from thewrong service court may mean (a) the correctserver delivers a serve from the wrong service court, or (b) this wrongserver delivers a serve from either the correct or incorrect servicecourt. Law 12, Paragraph 2. "Takes the serve"means receives the serve. Law 12, Paragraph 4, The proceduregiven for a player Inadvertently changing sides when he should notdo so. under the conditions noted, also applies should a player failto change sides when he should do so, under the same conditions

LAWS OF BADMINTON 195 J 1

DGWS SQUASH COMMITTEE 1972.1974

MARIGOLD A. EDWARDS, Chairman, Univ. of Pittsburgh,Pitts- burgh. Pa. 15213 ANN S. BAT 'H ELDER, Wellesley College, Wellesley. Mass, 02181 CATHERINE GREEN. University of Washington. Seattle,Wash, 98195 ELOISE M. JAEGER. University of Minnesota. Minneapolis, Minn. 55455 ELIZABETH F, RICHEY, Vassar College, Poughkeepsie. N.Y. 12601

EDITORIAL COMMENT The sport of squash has been added to the list of 20sports for which Guides are published by the Division for Girlsand Women's Sports. The singlesrules and two articles appear inthis new Tenms-Badminton-Squash Guide. Marigold A. Edwards is the chair- man of the 1972-74 Squash Committee' she and her committee will be working to increase the scope andccverage in the next Guide. If youhave any questions. comments. of suggestions. please writeto Marigold A. Edwards. 104 Trees !fall. University of Pittsburgh. Pittsburgh, Pennsylvania 15213. Betty Brown SGOR Chairman, 1971-72

136 DGWS TENNIS-BADMINTON-SQUASH GUIDE Basic ideas for Beginning Squash

BETTY SHELLENBERGER

Betty Shelknberger is an instructor in the Physical Education Department at Chestnut Hill College. Philadelphia. She has been a ranking player in singles and doubles in squash and has held the USWSRA Senior Singles title. Aspast president of the USWSRA, she is currently chairman of theUSWSRA Ref-ac's Committee.

Squash racquets is a game in which you attemptto outwit and outmaneuver your opponent in a confined space. Asa novice in the sport the following discussion offers a few poirts whichmay help you become a successful player. Once a beginning player has mastered the basic forehandand backhand strokes, she should woik on three shots and herserve. Two of these shots will keep her opponent in the backcourt while the third is a short shot into the forecourt.

Wall Shot A wall shot stays close to the side wall but doesnot hit it or angle out into the center of the court making aneasy return for the opponent. It is played straight to the front wall whenone has been forced by an opponent to playa shot near the side wall. It is hit straight hard, and deep so that it does not touch thefloor until after it has crossed the service line. It can be practicedalone or during a game by trying to play every point using this shot.

Crosscourt Shot A second deep shot is the crosscourt drive. Itis hit on an angle to the front wall from one side of the court to the otherand should not bounce until after it has crossed the service line. Ifpossibleit should hit the back wall before hitting the side wallas this will make it more difficult for the opponent to return.

Corner Shot When an opponent is in the back court, this isthe time to play a short corner shot. The ball should be played into the sidewall on the same side as the opponent wl:n she made her last shot. It should hit the side wall no further than three feet from the frontwall. It will then hit the front wall and go off atan angle away from the BASIC IDEAS FOR BEGINNING SQUASH 197 opponent. This corner shot should be hit as close to the "tin" as possible. To succeed in squash, all these shots must be done with both the forehand and backhand strokes and the ball hit firmly. Thenovice pla;cr should not rush her shots as there is more time to stroke the ballproperly than one firstrealizes. A short back swing and follow-through with good wrist action will also produce better shots. The serve is a very vital part of the game. A good serve can win many points byeither being unreturnable or by forcing your opponent to make a defensive stroke. The most successful serve is the underhand, soft, high, deer serve. !deafly it should drop justin front of the back wall: but the beginner should strive to have itnot touch the side wall until after ithas passed the service line. Many beginners find that the serve is a very difficult stioke to execute. If the player will first concentrate on looking at the ball andswinging through with the racr Liet, she should succeed in getting the ballinto play. For variety and a change of pace, an overhandserve which is hit hard just above the service line on the front wallcan be very effect've. The beginner should try to have thisserve hit the back wall close to the floor sl her opponent will have to makea defensive return shot.

Tips for Match Play Once you start playing matches it is customary to rally withyour opponent before commencing formal play. A player hits shotson one side of the court and then switches with her opponent so they may both have an equal opportunity of hitting the basic strokes. The ballisusually hit alternately but a player could hit a number of consecutive will shots to get the feel of that stroke. During this warm-up. notice how your opponent strikes the ball, whether or not she is quick in her movements and has control of her shots. At this time each player should also practice her serve. Thereis a great difference in the height of courts. This can greatly affect thesuccess of a player's serve. Also, sonic courtsare heated while others arc affected only by the outside temperature. Thiscan make a player's serve and, indeed. her other shots vary each time she plays. Control of the court is important in a match A player shouldtry to maintain a position just at the top of the junction of theservice boxes. known as the "T." This places her where shecan get to most shots quickly and be in a good position to makea shot. When the ball is being played by an opponent behind her, the player should try to watch what is going to happen to the ball. This will assist her anticipation so she will he better prepared to make her next shot. Squash is a fun game, one in winch you can geta lot of exercise in a very short tonne. You do not need an opponent to improve most 198 DGWS TENNISBADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE An Introduction to Squash

MARIGOLD A. EDWARDS

Marigold A. Edwards, associate professor at the Universityof Pittsburgh,receivedherundergraduate degrees from the Universities of Otago and Canterbury inNewZealand and her 111.-';'d. and Ph.D. degrees from the Universityof Pittsburgh. Active in 11w racket sports, she is a national clinicianin tennis and badminton for the Lifetime Sports Education Projectand currently holder of the Canadian Ladies Open Squash Singles title. She is ranked second in Squash Singlesiv USA and is the first woman to he admitted to the Penns) IvanzaSports Ila 11 of Fame, Western Pennsylvania Chapter. Sheis the chairman of the 1972-74 Squash Guide Comm itzee.

Looking for activity? The energy expenditure for squash quoted as 650+ calories per hour or 9+ times basal vent les that it is a fast and vigorous game. As a whole body activityitprovides sufficient stimulus for training the cardiorespiratory system. Becauseit is one of the fastest court games in the world, the neophyte hasdifficulty in visually tracking the ball which reaches speedsup to 170 mph among top players. In many parts of the country the few existing squash courts are located in men-only facilities of private clubs and so itis often not recognized as an excellent sport for women. The thoughts and suggestions which follow might help the beginning player or teacher seeking insight into thegame or mouse some Interest in those as yet unexposed. The tools of squashare standard and can be noted in any technique book. As a racket sport, squash has much in common with tennis and badminton in both performance and teaching. Experiencein tennis particularly facilitatesthelearning of squash. unfortunately the effect is not reciprocals The difficulty with tennis is learningto keep the ball mbounds where:: in squash one can scarcely hit it out!How many can rally after a six-week tennis course? Almost none. Squash, incontrast, has the possibility for instant success. Theserve in squash is no stumbling block either and ata beginning level its functionis simply to gettheball into play with an overhead, sidearm. or underhand stroke. The badminton player willentoy the light and shade of squash rallies that mix hard drives, soft drops,and lobs for a cat and mouse effectand this is the fun part of the game' Students respond to the cognitive approach to learninga skill. An understanding of the mechanical principles involved provides logic AN INTRODUCTION TO SQUASH 199 fortheform of the movement which, becauseitisefficient, promotes control and therefore skillA logical approach to the racket sports deals with angles and forces and the aerodynamics of the ball. The net result is much more rewarding than a trial and erro, approach, and the understanding facilitates a happy compromise of the long-standing conflict between form and effectiveness. Apparent style variance among better players is merely personal flourishsuperimposed on form whichiswithintherange of mechanical correctness A source of real frustration for the beginner isthe judging of balls off the side or back walls, yet a brief explanation of the angle of incidence and angle of reflection and the modifying factors changes the nature of the problem to a cognitive challenge. As with tennis and badminton, the crux of the matter is learning where the racket face is-- and hitting a million balls is the standard and necessary process! There are many stroking and simulated game drills to help reach this goal. Self-practice is invaluable, mirror practice is very helpful too especially if the cognitive approach has been used. Unlike tennis and badminton, squash does not enjoy the safety of a net separating the opponents, but fear not, for wielding the racquet is a matter of social responsibility as is driving a car or skiing a crowded slope. Appreciation of the racket motion ina verticalplaneclarifiesthespace situation and eliminates the dangerous horizontal swipe, i.e., the backswing is "up" and not "around the corner." For beginners without a tennis background, I would recommend starting with the Australian ball. Softer and more bouncy, its slower speed allows ample time to hit while encouraging longer rallies from the outset (remember, herein hes the fun!), and the students are not afraid of it. On the other hand, the North American ball leaves its mark physically and psychologically! At a later time the changeover can be made rather easily as borne out by the British and Australian players who adapt so quickly and successfully to our hard, fast ball. Skill in stroking frees the player to concentrate on the game. Strategy in its simplest form is basically, as for any racquet sport, putting the ball where the opponent isn't. Since the court is longer than wide, the up and back diagonal provides the greatest distance to move. As in badminton, deceptionis dependent on apparently identical stroke preparation. This is based on an understanding of the sources of power, namely weight transfer, shoulder rotation, and the cumulative speed of the three short levers that make up the racket arm. Appropriate footwork is implied since how one moves on the court can make or break power and deception One can play good squash with two basic strokes: rails (shots along the wall) and crosscourts. Forget the fancy stuff, for the variety of strokes conies much later if then, and constitutes a low 200 DGWS TENNISBA DM INTON-SDUASH GUIDE percentage at best. Learn the theme beforepermitting variations on the theme. When in trouble, elongatethe time lapse between shots For example. lobbing deep andsoft into the backcourtgives you maximum time between hitting and having to hitagain On the otner hand, if you are in control.decrease the time between shots by hitting hard and fast. Obvious but underrated is the needto practice watching the ball at all times. and whatever has to be doneto see the ball. do it!it travels too fast to pickup in flight and then make a useful Watch your opponent response in your peripheral vision and always beaware of where she is. butnever take your eyes off the ball during play. One must have faith that the telltale.front wall. and corners will not move or leave the area while youare playing your shot For those of you whoare dedicated teachers remember that practice allows the seed you plantedto grow and develop, but practice does not make perfect-it must be thoughtful practice. One-half hour of thoughtfulpractice ir worth several half -hours of aimless playingAs many master teachers have pointedout. the essence of teachingisnotthe "what- (which for thegames skills is fairly well standardized) butthe "how.- So often we tell students "what- to do, and neglectto tell them "how- to do it "Ilit the ball lower on the front wall!"But how is that done'' It is the "how- that is the essence ofacademic freedom. and itis up lo you, you- personality. enthusiasm, and creativityto capitalize on it Instant success ispossible in squash. Simplify eliminate your approach. allunnecessarydetails without compromisingcorrect technique, until the studentsare hooked on itThe key is fun. for what other reason wouldwe teach it than with the hope thatgiven the opportunity, some may electto play the game in the,. leisure time. and this decision is basedon fun and skill AS players ofteachers we are working toincreaseball and therefore racket control and thisrequires good form, and good form is simple, clean. and mechanicallyefficienthence the need to understand the mechanical principles. Thisis tbe apical approach and allows the activity to becomea congnitive a., well as a physwai challenge.

AN INTRODUCTION TO SQUASH 201 United States Squash Racquets Association Singles Rules

1. Server. At the start of a match the choice to serve or receive shall be decided by the spin of a racquet. The server retains the serve until he loses a point, in which event he loses the serve 2. Service. A ballisin play from the moment at which itis delivered in service until (a) the point is decided; (b) a fault, as hereinafter defined is made, or (c)a let or let point, as hereinafter defined. ocuirs. At the beginning of each game, and each time there is a new server, the ball shall be served from whichever service box the server elects and thereafter alternately until the service is lost or until the end of the game If the server serves from the wrong box, there shall be no penalty and the service shall count asif served from the correct box, provided, however, that if the receiver does not attealpt to return the service, he may demand that a be served from the other box, of if before the receiver attempts to return the service, the referee calls a let, (as hereinafter defined), the service shall be made from the other box. The server, until the ball has left the racquet from the service, must stand with at least one foot on the floor within, and not touching the line surrounding the service box and serve the ball onto the front wall above the sum( line andI Blow tie 16 -inch line before it touches any other part of the coo so that on its rebound (return), it first strikes the floor within, bu not touching, the lines of the opposite service court, either befor or after touching any other wail or walls within the court. A ball so served is a good service, otherwise it is a fault. If the first service is a fault, the server shall serve again flow the same side. If the server makes two consecutive faults, he loses the point. A service called a fault may not be played, but the receiver may volley any service which has struck the front wall in accordance with this rule. 3. Return of Service and Subsequent Play. (a) To make a good return of a service or of 1 subsequent return, the ball must be struck on the volley or before it has touched the floor twice, and reach the front wall on the fly above the telltale, and it may touch any wall or walls within the court before or after reaching the front wall. A return IF deemej to be made at the instant the ball touches the racquet of the player making the return. (b) If the receiver tads to make a gt od return of a good service, the server wins the point. If the receiver makes a good return of service, the players shall alternate making returns until one player 202 DGWS TENNIS-BA TONSQUASH GUIDE fails to make a good return The player tailing to makea good return loses the point (c) Until the ball has been touched or has hit the floor twice.it may be struck at any numi)e: oftin (d) If at any time the ball hits outside the playing surfaces of the court, which includes the ceiling and/o- lights or hits a line marking the playing surfaces of the court (except on the firstservice, when it is one fault), it is a point against the player so hitting the ball 4. Score.Each point won by a player shall add one to his score 5. Game. The player who first scores IS pointswins the game excepting that. (a)At "13 all" the player who has first reached the score of 13 must elect one of the following before the next serve. ( I) Set to 5 points making the game 18 points (2) Set to 3 points- making the game 16 points. (3) No set, in which event the game remains 15 points. (b) At "14 all," provided the score has not been "13 all," the player who has first reached the score of 14 must electone of the following before the next serve: (1) Set to 3- making the game 17 points. (2) No set, in which event the game remains 15 points. 6. Match. Amatch shall be the best three out of five games 7. Keep Out of Opponent's Way.Each player must get out of his opponent's way umnediately after he has struck the ball and (a) Must give his opponent a fair view of the ball, provided, however, interference purely with his opponent's vision in following the flight of the ball is not a let: (b) Must give his opponent a fair opportunity to get to and/or strikeatthe ballin any position on the court elected by his opponent: (c) Must allow his opponent to play the ball from any parts of the court elected by his opponent, (d) Must allow his opponent to play the ball to any part of the front wall or to either side near the front wall, 8. Ball in Play Touching Player.Ifa ball in play,after hittingthe front wall, 1 0fore being retained again, shall touch either player, or anything hi r ears or carries (other than the racquet of the player who makes theIe t urn), the player so touched loses the point, except as provided in Rale 9(b) If aballinplay touches the player who last returnedit or anything he wears or carries before it hits the front wall, the player so touched loses the point, If a ball in play, after being struck by a player on a return, hits ,he player's opponent or anything his opponent wearsor carries before reaching the front wall

UNITED STATES SQUASH RACQUETS ASSOCIATION 20'1 (a) The player who made the return shall lose the point if the return would not have been good. (b) The player who made the return shall win the point if the ball would have gone directly from the racquet of the player making the return to the front wall without first touching any other wall. (c) The point shall be replayed as a let (Rule 9) if the return, except for such interference, would have hit the front wall fairo, and (I) would have touched sonic other wall before so hitting the front wall, or (2) has hit some other wall before hitting the player's opponent or anything he wears or carries. When there is no referee, if the player who made the return -,es notconcede thatthereturnwoilldnothave been good, or alternatively, if the player's opponent does not concede that the ball has hit him (or anything he wears or carries) and would have gone directly to the front wall without first touLaing any other wall, the point shall be replayed as a let (Rule 9). In all cases covered by the rule, play shall cease even though the ball goes up. 9. Let. A let is the stopping of play and the playing over of a point. In addition to thelets describedinRules 2 and 8 (c), the following are lets if the player whose turn itis to strike the ball could otherwise have made a good return. (a) When such player's opponent violates Rule 7, (b) When owing to the position of such player, his opponent is unable to avoid being touched by the ball. (c) When such player refrains from striking at the ball because of a reasonable fear of injuring his opponent, (d) When such player before actually hitting or in the act of striking or strikingatthe ballis touched by his opponent, his racquet or anything he wears or carries. (e) When on the first bounce from the floor the ball hits on or above the 6'loot line on the '.ck wall, (f) When a ball in play breaks. If a player thinks the ball has broken while play is in progress he must nevertheless complete the point and then immediately requesta let, giving the ball to the referee for inspection. The referee shall allow a let only upon such immediate request if the ball proves in fact to be broken. A player -aay request a let or a let point. A request by a player for a let shall automatically include a request for a let point. Upon such request, the referee shall allow a let. let point, or no let. No let shall be allowed on any stroke a player makes unless he requests such let before actually hitting or in the act of striking or striking at the ball. The referee may not gall or allow a let as defined in this Rule 9 unless such letis requested by a player: provided, however, the 204 DGWS TENNISBADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE I

referee may call a let at any time (1) when thereis interference ...,,t1' play caused by any factor beyond the control of theplayers, or when he fears that a player is about to suffersevere physical inju' On the replay of the po.nt the server (I)is entitled to two ser, even though a fault was called on the original point, (2) mustst,. from the correct box even though he served from thewrong boN. the original point, and (3) provided he isa new server, may 5(IC fro:t a service box other than the one he selectedon the orig. .1 point 10. Let Point.A let point is the unnecessary violation of Rule 7 (b), 7 (c) or 7 (d) An unnecessary violationoccurs (I) when the player fails to make the necessary effort withinthe scope of his normal ability to avoid the violation, thereby depriving hisopponent of a dear opportunity to attempta winning shot, or (2) when the player has repeatedly failed to make thenecessary effort within the scope of his normal ability to avoid similar violations. The player unnecessarily violating Rule 7 (b), 7 (c) or 7 (d) loses thepoint. When there is no referee, if a player does not concedethat he has unnecessarily violated Rule 7 (b), 7 (c), or 7 (d), thepoint shall be replayed as a let. 11. Continuity of Play.Play mall be continuous from the first service of each game until thegame is concluded. Between each game, play may be suspended by either player fora period not to exceed two minutes. and between the third andfourth games play may he suspended by either player for a period not to exceed five minutes. Except during the five-minute periodat the end of the third game, no player may leave the court withoutpermission of the referee. The referee may suspend play for suchperiod as he may consider necessary. If play is suspended by the refereebecause of an injury to one of the players. such player mustresume play within one hour or default the match. The foregoingprovisions shall be strictly construed. Play shall never be suspendedto allow a player to recover his strength or his wind. The referee shall be the solejudge ofintentionaldelay, and, after giving due warning, hemust disqualify the offender In tlie event the referee suspends play other than forinjury to a player and for some cause beyond the control of bothplayers, such as the failure of the electric lighting system, play shall be resumed when the cause of such suspension of play hasbeen eliminated, provided, however, if such cause of delay cannot be rectifiedwithin one hour, the match shall he postponed to such tuneasthe tournament committee determines and the match shall be resumed from the point and game score existingat the time the match was stopped unless the referee and both players unanimouslyagree to play the entire match or any part of itover.

UNITED STATES SQUASH RACQUETS ASSOCIATION 205 12. Attire and Equipment. la) Players attire must be white. Any controversy over attireshall be decided by the referee. whose dec.aon shall be final. (b) ThestandardsinglesballoftheUnited States Squash Racquets Association shall be of black rubber 1.700 to1 750 inches indiameter and shall weigh1.12to1.17 ounces.!tshall be pneumatic At a ball temperature of 70' to F ,it shall have a rebound on a steel plate between 24 to 26 inches from a drop of 100 inches Al ter 10 minutes or more of play or at a ball temperature of 83to 84- 1' it shall have a rebound on a steel plate of 27 to 30 macs from a drop 01 100 inches For a supplementary test in a court, alter10 minutes or more of play the ball shall have a rebound Iron the feet rear red line of not more than 25 inches and not less than 23 inches The difference in rebound between a ball before play and after play of 10 minutes or more. whatever the temperature of the court oi the ball, shall not exceed 20 percent of the before ?lay rebound 1.01 purposes ofthisrulea minimum of 300 blows by the authowed tc.ting device of the Association shall be deemed to be the equivalent of the 10 minutes or more 01 play referred to above. since this procedure yields a ba:: ,mipmatute of 83' to 84' F. ;Manufacturers may use thetesting device of the Association wind' rsavailable through the chan man of the Committee on Courts. Bats and Balls or procure their own (c)Hie racquet or bat shall be made of wood and have a circular shaped head with a diameter not exceeding 9 inches. and shall not exceed 27 Indies overall length. with a weight of approximately 10 ounces. It shall be strung with gut or a substitute material. provided it is not metal Materials or racquet designs which do not conform with this section. or the generally recogm/ed manufacturer's standards. should be submitted to the l'xecutwe Committee for approval prior to manufacture or usage. 13. Condit on of Ball. (a) No ball. below or during a match may be artificially heatedthat is, heated or chilled (1)) Atny time. when not in actual play, another ball way be substituted by the mutual consent of the contestants or by decision of the referee 4. Conditionof Court.No equipmentofanysortshall be peimitted to IC111,1111 in the court during a match other than the ball used in play, the racquets used by the players, and the chthes worn by them. All other equipment. such as extra balls, exth racquets. sweaters when not being worn, towels, bathrobes. etc.. must be left outside the court. A player who requirea towel or cloth to wipe his eyeglasses should keep same in his pocket or securely fastened to his belt oi waist DGWS TENNIS-BADMINTONSQUASH GUIDE 15. Referee. (a) A reteree shallcontrol the game This control he exercised from the shill time the players enter the court. Thereferee may limit the time of thewarm-up period to five minutes, terminate a longer warm-up period or shall so that the matt!) commencesat the scheduled tune Tin, referee'sdecision on all questions of play hailbe final except as providedin Rule 15(b), th) Two judges may be appointedto act on any appeal by pk,ver to a deeigon of the a referee When such judgesare acting in a match, a player may appealany decision of the referee to the judges. exec pt as provided in paragraph (d)hereof If one judge the referee, the referee's decision agr,:es with stands, it both judges disagreewith chireferee, the judges' decisionis final. The )edges shall make rulings unless an appeal has no been made. The decision ofthe judges shall be announced promptlyby the referee (c) A player shall not state hisreasons for his request under Rule ( for a let or let pointor for his appeal from any decision referee or judges, provided, bowever, of the that the referee mayrequest the player to state hisreasons. (d) After giving duewarning, the referee in his discretion disqualify a play( r for speech may or conduct unbecoming to thegame of sqaash racquets. Ibis decision ofthe referee may not he appealed

UNITED STATES SQUASH RACQUETS ASSOCIATION 207 DGWS SPECIAL PUBLICATIONS

()GINS Researct Report. Women in Sports. 1971 1243065201 Forward Riding Manual for Teachers (24307342) GAA Manual. 1966 124307730) Handbook for Teaching Basketball Officiating. 1969 124308038) Manual for Teaching Western Riding (24325106) Philosophy and Standards for Girls and Women's Sports 1970 (24307988) "Polly" Cartoons Revised 1968 (24307846) "Polly" Cartoons II. 1971 (24325170) AI AW Handbook. 1971 published annually (24325228/ Selected Archery Articles. 1971 (24325160) Selected Aquatics Articles. 1971 (24307596) Selected Articles. 1971 (24325134) Selected Field Hockey and Lacrosse Articles. 1971 (24325162) Selected Gymnastics Articles. 1971 (24325164) Selected Riding Articles. 1969 124308036) Selected Soccer-Speedball Articles. 1971 (24325152) Selected Softball Articles. 1969 (24308044) Selected Tennis-Badminton Articles. 1970 124306894) Selected 'rack and Field Articles. 1971 (24325166) Selected 311eyball Articles. 1970 (24306896) Sports Programs for College Women (24325124) Training of Judges for Girls Gymnastics. 1971 (243069221 Technique: ''harts Archery. 1969 124308046) Badminton. 1967 (24307842) Basketball. 1965 (24306878) . 1969 (24308048) Softball. 1967 (24306874) Swimming. 1971 12432513.)) Speedball. 1969 (24308050) Tennis. 1967 124307844) Volleyball. 1969 (24308052) Second National Institute on Girls Sports. Fencing, anneing and kayaking, track anti field, and gymnastics (24:307220) Third National Institute on Girls Sports. Skiing and figure skating (24307768) Fifth Natioi:al Institute on Girls Sports 1969 Basketball, gymnast'. s, and ttai k and field coat fling i.ind offs ( lazing (24308054)

ORDER FROM American Association for Health, Physical Education, and Recreation 1201 Sixteenth Street, NM., Washington, D. C 20036